Home

Net Inspector - MG

Contents

1. SSEVERITY Event severity level e g critical major SSEVERITY_ID Event severity ID number 2 normal 4 informational 8 warning 16 minor 32 major 64 critical SSOURCE_ID ID number of event source e g 65595 SSOURCE_NAME Name of event source e g MyServer SSOURCE_INFO Additional information about the source of event e g Physical Memory SSOURCE_TYPE Type of source e g IP SMESSAGE Event messag e g Threshold value for storage usage exceeded SMESSAGE_ID Event message ID number e g 11007 SCAUSE Event cause e g Threshold Crossed SCAUSE_ID Event cause number e g 549 SEVENT_TYPE Event type e g Equipment SEVENT_TYPE_ID Event type ID number e g 5 SDATE_TIME Date and tim of vent e g Thu 19 Oct 2006 01 50 28 PM CEST STHRESHOLD Threshold value in case of a threshold event e g 86 744 b The following notification reserved words are available for events generated from received SNMP Trap and Inform notifications that are not included in the built in notification to event mapping table see also the SNMP notification section of Event Details sub window SNOTIFICATION Identity name of SNMP notification STIME_STAMP Notification s time stamp value SAGENT_ADDRESS Address of notification sender SV1AGENT_ADDRESS SNMPv1 agent address from SNMPv1 Trap SPROTOCO
2. Net Inspector can automatically add discovered devices to the workspace i e selected user view and to the Device Panel dialog box e to selected configuration depending on the discovery operation settings Furthermore users with administrator access rights are authorized to manually add objects which are registered with the system to maps as well as configure their settings and remove them from maps Objects can be placed onto maps from the Device Panel dialog box or from the Discovery dialog box Additionally users with administrator access rights can manually create new objects of certain types and add them to the currently active map in the Maps window by using the Maps window Add New Object pop up command This method allows adding new objects to the system Next users with administrator access rights can import managed objects from a CSV comma separated value file by using the Maps window Add Import from CSV File pop up command Finally new objects can be added to the system also by selecting one or more existing managed object s and choosing the Edit Duplicate command Newly added objects appear also in the Device Panel dialog box 3 1 12 Viewing Alarms for Selected Objects To view all active alarms on selected objects select one or more object in the Map window and use the Alarms Active Alarms pop up command This operation creates a new tab in the Events window and displays all active alarms associa
3. Class The class of the object which can be one of the following a Workstation Server Printer Switch Router Gateway Equipment Multiplexer Transport Database UUUUUUUUU 15 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Net Inspector Client Main Window Firewall Transmitter Any Action used for action objects System used for system objects Ooooo Tags Displays tags user descriptions annotated to the managed object Objects can be searched by the value of their tags Location Displays the physical location of the managed object Net Inspector discovery operation sets this value to the value of the sysLocation 0 object instance returned by the SNMP agent Vendor Displays the managed object vendor name Net Inspector discovery operation sets this value to the name of the enterprise responsible for the OID namespace returned by the sysObjectID 0 object instance The enterprise names displayed are taken from the list of private numbers as registered with IANA and stored on the Net Inspector Server Engine data nienterprise txt OS The operating system running on the managed object URL The URL uniform resource locator address that provides additional information about the managed object By default this is the URL of the performance statistics page of the managed object OS The operating system running on the managed object URL The URL uniform resource locator address that provides addition
4. Value drop down list or input line Lets you enter or select the condition value Available and valid values depend on the type of the condition selected LA 133 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Server Settings Dialog Box Conditions panel The Conditions panel displays and lets you re configure existing filter conditions and logical operators connecting them Example of the Conditions panel contents ED active logical operator 1 level H inactive logical operator 2 level 8 Binding 4 OID contains ifAdminStatus VALUE is down 2 5 lt condition 5 ER active logical operator 2 level A SNMP Version SNMPv2c 3 SNMP Version SNMPy3 two conditions combined with logical OR E Simple mode is enabled y Simple i Advanced ji Expression equivalent to the filter displayed above would be Binding 4 OID contains ifAdminStatus value is down 2 syntax is integer32 AND SNMP version SNMPv2c OR SNMP version SNMPv3 Simple and Advanced Mode Conditions panel contains two tabs providing two modes of operation Simple and Advanced For more information about Simple and Advanced modes please consult the Create Filter dialog box section Editing Conditions For more information about editing existing conditions please consult the corresponding description of the Create Filter dialog box section The variable binding condition editing slightly differs from editing
5. a Cause Specifies the cause of the alarm or event If this condition type is selected you can choose a cause from the Value drop down list e g Lan Error a Type Specifies the type of the alarm or event If this condition type is selected you can choose an event type from the Value drop down list e g Communication a Event state Specifies the siate of the alarm or event If this condition type is selected you can choose an event or alarm state from the Value drop down list e g ACKNOWLEDGED or MANUALLY CLEARED or UNCLEARED etc a Un Acknowledge time Specifies the date and time of acknowledging or unacknowledging the alarm or event If this condition type is selected you can enter the desired date and time into the Value input line using the date and time formatting as configured in the user preferences eg Sep 12 2008 12 45 12 PM a Un Clear time Specifies the date and time of clearing or unclearing the alarm or event If this condition type is selected you can enter the desired date and time into the Value input line using the date and time formatting as configured in the user preferences e g Sep 12 2008 12 45 12 PM a Event state info Specifies who has changed the state of the alarm or event as last This can be either a user that has managed alarm e g acknowledged unacknowledged manually cleared uncleared or the Auto if the alarm has been automatically
6. To open the Manage Discovery Filters dialog box select the Tools Manage Discovery Filters command Alternatively click the Manage Discovery Filters button in the Configure Discovery dialog box 18 3 Description Users with administrator access rights can use Manage Discovery Filters dialog box to create edit and remove discovery filters Once the discovery filter is created it can be applied to one or more discovery operations by selecting its name from the Discovery filter drop down list in the relevant Discovery Preferences dialog box Discovery filters contain one or more filter conditions The Manage Discovery Filters dialog box includes the following controls Filter list Lists the names of existing discovery filters Add button Opens the New Filter dialog box which lets you create and configure a new discovery filter Edit button Opens the Edit Filter dialog box which lets you modify the selected discovery filter Remove button Deletes the selected discovery filter Close button Closes the Manage Discovery Filters dialog box 18 3 1 New Edit Filter dialog box The New Filter dialog box and Edit Filter dialog box contain a toolbar that lets you create filter conditions and add them to the filter one by one while the central section of the dialog box Conditions panel displays the entire filter consisting of filter conditions and LO 198 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Manage Disco
7. 1 INTRODUCTION This reference manual describes the graphical user interface GUI and commands available in the Net Inspector Java Client application Net Inspector Client connects to the Net Inspector Server and provides a GUI for monitoring the status of managed objects and viewing and managing alarms on managed objects All program commands in this manual are written in bold and italic letters If two or more commands are combined together individual commands are separated by the character For example Tools Client Preferences which means click the Tools entry in the menu bar and select the Client Preferences command from the Tools menu The term click in this manual means a single click with the left mouse button while the term right click is used for a single click with the right mouse button All hyperlinks in text are colored blue e g Client Preferences dialog box Clicking a hyperlink opens the page which the hyperlink points to The content of this manual is listed in the Table of Contents Note Not all commands and dialog boxes described in this manual can be accessed by all users Which commands and dialog boxes will be available to a particular user depends on the access rights that are assigned to this user For more information on this please see the About Users Access Rights and User Views section of this manual 4 10 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manua
8. and the other to clear the alarm i e set its severity level to Cleared Each trap to alarm mapping rule consists of two parts a trap filter part and an alarm mapping part A trap filter contains one or more conditions that must be met in order for the SNMP notification to be controlled by the given rule and accordingly mapped to alarm These conditions are attributes of the SNMP notification e g enterprise specific OID variable bindings the version of the SNMP protocol used for conveying the notification etc Alarm mapping part on the other hand determines the attributes of the resulting alarm i e the severity level alarm message and source info of the alarm The source info property can be configured to contain one or more attributes of the received SNMP notification by using notification reserved words If specified the source info value serves also as a condition for clearing the alarm as described below Once you create a trap to alarm rule it is automatically applied meaning that from that moment on Net Inspector will map all newly received SNMP notifications that match the given trap filter to alarms according to the rule The Trap To Alarm Rules panel includes the following controls Rules List Displays the list of existing trap to alarm rules It contains the following columns Rule Name Displays the names of existing trap to alarm rules Specific OID Displays the OID that identifies the SNMP
9. Cancel button Discards all changes and closes the dialog box Review Settings and Start Discovery Step 4 This is the last step of the Network Discovery Wizard Here you can review the discovery settings and start or cancel the discovery operation Click the Start Discovery button to starts the network discovery operation or the Cancel button to quit the Network Discovery Wizard without starting the discovery operation LA 190 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Discovery Panel Dialog Box 17 DISCOVERY PANEL DIALOG BOX 17 1 Purpose The Discovery Panel dialog box lists all existing discovery operations within Net Inspector it lets you view their status and properties as well as delete existing and add new discovery operations to the dialog box The subordinated dialog boxes let you add discovered network devices and their interconnections to one or more user views Discovered devices can also be added to the Device Panel dialog box 17 2 Opening To open the Discovery Panel dialog box select the Tools Discovery Panel command 17 3 Description The Discovery Panel dialog box lists all existing discovery operations by their names and displays the status of every discovery operation It also lets you open discovery operations to view their properties and network discovery results as well as delete existing and add new discovery operations to the dialog box Users with administrator access rights are
10. Target drop down list Specifies the name of the target endpoint device and lets you select the network interface on that device used for establishing the given connection 33 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Net Inspector Client Main Window OK Applies the changes and closes the Connection Labels dialog box Cancel Discards all changes and closes the Connection Labels dialog box 3 1 8 Find Objects Dialog Box To open the Find Objects dialog box select the Edit Find Objects command The Find Objects dialog box lets you search for those objects in the given user view that match the user specified search condition The result of a search operation is displayed in a separate Search tab in the Maps window where found objects are listed using the details view Search condition can be specified by using the following controls in the Find Objects dialog box Search by drop down list Lets you select the property type of the condition by which the objects will be searched e g Name Description Status IP address etc A detailed description of object properties can be found in the Map window details view section of this manual Managed objects can be searched also by the names of the assigned polling and SNMP access profiles Operator drop down list Lets you select the operator e g is is not contains is greater or equal is smaller or equal etc Available operators dep
11. a Keep Cleared Alarms toggle menu option If this option is checked alarms that are cleared by Net Inspector remain listed in the current view otherwise they automatically disappear from the current list of alarms when cleared a Keep Manually Cleared Alarms toggle menu option If this option is checked alarms that are manually cleared by the user remain listed in the current view otherwise they automatically disappear from the current list of alarms when cleared Settings View The Settings view provides the following read only information acquired from the event section of the Net Inspector Server initialization file DB type input line The type of the event database used Solid or ODBC DSN input line The data source name of the ODBC database or the parameters protocol IP address and port for accessing the Solid database e g TCP 192 168 187 122 1320 User input line The username used for accessing the database Write input line Controls what events are stored in the event database alarms and events or only alarms Catalog input line The catalog name for accessing the Solid database Execute maintenance checkbox If this checkbox is checked the database maintenance is enabled lts operation depends on the option selected below EQ 90 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual System Object Properties Windows a When the number of events exceeds X radio button and input line If
12. a Manually Clear Manually clears the selected alarms Note that Net Inspector system alarms i e alarms that have the Message ID value in the range of 10000 15000 cannot be manually cleared a Manually Unclear Unclears the selected alarms reverses the Manually Clear operation a Remove Cleared Alarms Removes all cleared alarms from the list a Find Events Opens the Find Events dialog box and automatically inserts appropriate search conditions for finding events or alarms associated with the given object o Export Opens the Export Events dialog box which lets you export alarms currently displayed in the General view of the Properties window to a HTML or CSV comma separated value file format The Export Events dialog box closely resembles the operating system s standard Save As dialog box Note that only information provided by the columns which are currently displayed will be exported o Select All Ctrl A Selects all displayed alarms a Table Options cascading menu a Keep Cleared Alarms toggle menu option If this option is checked alarms that are cleared by Net Inspector remain listed in the current view otherwise they automatically disappear from the current list of alarms when cleared a Keep Manually Cleared Alarms toggle menu option If this option is checked alarms that are manually cleared by the user remain listed in the current view otherwise they automatically disappear from the current
13. and critical the map will reflect the color assigned to the critical status e red by default Furthermore a map icon also indicates the most critical new alarm i e active alarm that is not acknowledged that exists on the objects within the given map and its submaps This is achieved by displaying the alarm severity level symbol on top of the map icon for example LJ 39 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Net Inspector Client Main Window Severity level of the most critical new alarm on the objects within this map and its submaps is Warning Severity level of the most critical new alarm on the objects within this map and Hal its submaps is Major Severity level of the most critical new alarm on the objects within this map and its submaps is Critical 3 2 4 Pop Up Menu The Explorer window pop up menu can be displayed by right clicking an icon that represents the Net Inspector Server root icon user view or a sub map or by right clicking the white area inside the Explorer window This menu contains commands specific to the selected object or commands specific to the Explorer window when nothing is selected Furthermore some of the commands in this pop up menu are available only in the design mode The Explorer window pop up menu contains the following commands depending on the selection and on the mode of operation as described below a Disconnect Disconnects Net Inspect
14. reserved word is replaced with the severity level of the event e g Critical To view all available reserved words click the Insert button next to the Arguments input line to open the Reserved Words dialog box listing available reserved words and their descriptions To add a reserved word to the Arguments input line select it in the Reserved Words list and click the Insert button You can also combine regular text with the reserved words e g s SEVERITY Insert Button Opens the Reserved Words dialog box which lets you add reserved words to the Arguments input line Terminate command after X seconds checkbox and input line If this checkbox is checked you can specify how long each command process started by this action object can run before it will be forcedly terminated by Net Inspector Server if it is still running This option lets you terminate the processes which do not end by themselves after they have performed the designated action 0 85 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Action Object Properties Windows Filters View The Filters view contains the following controls Available filters frame Enabled checkbox If this checkbox is checked the corresponding filter is enabled applied meaning that only events that match the conditions of the selected filter will trigger the command specified in the Settings view of the given command object Filter list Displays the name
15. Lets you choose the class of the object Submap drop down list Displays the name of the sub map to which the new object will be added By default this drop down list displays the name of the currently active sub map in the Maps window To add the object to another sub map click the Browse button next to his input line and select the sub map from the Browse dialog that appears Browse button Opens the Browse dialog box that lets you select the sub map to which you want to add the new object To create a new sub map select a map in the expandable map tree and click the Create New Map button This will create a new sub map directly below the selected sub map in the Browse dialog box To select a sub map expand the hierarchical map tree choose the desired sub map and click the OK button The name of the selected sub map will be displayed in the Submap drop down list Configuration drop down list Displays the configuration to which the object will be added i e the name of the configX section in the Net Inspector Server initialization file If more than one configuration configX section is present you can select the desired configuration from this drop down list Polling Engine drop down list Lets you choose the polling engine that will poll the given managed object Back button Lets you return to the previous screen i e the Select object type screen Finish button Closes the New Object dialog box and
16. Simple mode if the filter you are currently creating in Advanced mode does not match the simple filter scheme max two levels of logical operators AND operator on the first level OR operator s on the second level conditions of the same type are grouped together under the same OR operator on the second level In such case you need to edit the filter to match the simple filter scheme or delete it 173 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Create Filter Dialog Box Editing Conditions To edit an existing condition simply double click it in the Conditions panel or select it and click the Edit button in the right section of the dialog box Example Editing a filter condition Advanced mode Severity k lis k Major v Add Ana Edit A E Source hpjd1 Remove 2 Operat zeen s Q Severity Major a on Informational Simple Advanced The selected condition will be displayed in editable form where you can select new entries from the drop down lists or edit the value in the Value input line depending on the condition type Click the Apply button in the Conditions panel to apply the changes after you finish editing the condition Note The Simple mode lets you change only the operator and value not also the condition type when editing a condition in the Conditions panel To edit an existing logical operator Advanced mod
17. This frame provides controls that lets you preview and test the user defined command Object input line and Select button Specifies the managed object on which the command will be executed during the test Click the Select button to open the Select Source dialog box and select a managed object from it The Select Source dialog box displays two panels the left panel contains the expandable map tree while the panel on the right displays all objects included in the map that is selected in the left panel The left panel also displays some properties of the listed objects To select an object click the relevant map in the left panel choose the object on the right panel and click the OK button Preview button Displays a message box with fully expanded command line for a preview without actually executing the command Test button Executes the command on the selected object for test purposes 219 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual User Preferences Dialog Box 23 USER PREFERENCES DIALOG BOX 23 1 Purpose The User Preferences dialog box is used for setting user specific preferences like the colors for displaying alarms format for displaying the date and time etc These settings apply only to the user identified by the username that has configured them The user preferences settings are stored on the computer where Net Inspector Server software is installed When a user logs on to a Net Inspector Server the Client
18. active logical operator second level E Severity Critical severity Major two conditions combined with logical OR A Simple mode is enabled Simple k Advanced 172 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Create Filter Dialog Box Expression equivalent to the filter displayed above would be Source hpjd1 AND Severity Critical OR Severity Major Meaning Show all alarms triggered by hpdj object whose severity levels are either Critical or Major Simple and Advanced Mode Conditions panel contains two tabs providing two modes of operation Simple and Advanced The Simple mode which is enabled by default lets you create filters in a straightforward manner you only add filter conditions to the Conditions panel and the program automatically groups conditions of the same type and connects them with logical OR operator while conditions of a different type are connected with logical AND operator For example if you add two conditions of the same type eg severity critical and severity major they will be combined with the logical OR operator meaning that the filter will let trough alarms that satisfy either one or the other condition i e it will let trough all critical alarms and all major alarms If you on the other hand add two conditions of different types e g severity critical and message device is down they are connected with the logical AND operator meaning that
19. on remote CBx LU 50 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Net Inspector Client Main Window Cause Displays the cause of the alarm event e g Line Card Problem Event Type Displays the type of the eveni alarm e g Quality Of Service Communication etc Threshold This property is shown only for threshold alarms events and displays the crossed threshold value eg 90 0026 Un acknowledged Displays the date and time of un acknowledging the alarm and the username and IP address of the user who has acknowledged or unacknowledged the alarm whichever was last Manually un cleared Displays the date and time of manually un clearing the alarm and the username and IP address of the user who has manually cleared or uncleared the alarm whichever was last The SNMP Notification Section If the event alarm has been generated from an SNMP Trap or Inform notification message which is not included in the built in notification to event mapping table e g a generic SNMP Trap the SNMP Notification lt name of notification gt expandable section is displayed in the Event Details sub window besides the General Event Info section This section provides details of the original SNMP Trap or Inform notification Expand this section to view the following notification details Time stamp Displays the time stamp value of the received SNMP notification This value should correspond to the Trap sender s
20. only in Advanced mode o OR Adds the logical OR operator to the selected filter branch This button is enabled only in Advanced mode a Import Opens the Import dialog box which lets you select a previously saved filter and import it into the New Edit Filter dialog box Conditions panel The Import dialog box lets you select the filter either from the My filters repository which contains all previously saved display and search filters from the Action filters repository which contains all action filters available in the Action Filter Panel or from a file filters that have been saved to a file in previous versions of Net Inspector a OK Applies all changes and closes the dialog box The name of the filter is added to the Filter list in the Manage Action Filters dialog box when creating a new filter a Cancel Discards all changes and closes the dialog box 9 125 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Server Settings Dialog Box 8 5 Polling Engines Panel Purpose The Polling Engines panel is used for viewing adding editing and removing Performance Manager polling engines Description The Manage Polling Engines panel displays a list of existing Performance Manager polling engines and lets you add and configure additional polling engines for use with Net Inspector Performance Manager polling engines must first be installed and configured on remote computers This view provides the following
21. open the Event Details window by clicking the LA 47 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Net Inspector Client Main Window 3 4 4 Pop Up Menu The Events window pop up menu contains the following commands some of them are not available in all tabs of the Events window a Go To Source Selects the object in the Maps window which is has triggered the selected alarm or event a Add Comment Opens the Add Comment dialog box that lets you annotate the selected alarms with a comment Comments are displayed in the Comment column in the Events window a Akcnowledge Acknowledges the selected alarms By acknowledging alarms users declare that they are aware of them Acknowledged alarms are not shown in the alarm balloons Events cannot be acknowledged unacknowledged a Unacknowledge Unacknowledges the selected alarms reverses the Acknowledge operation a Manually Clear Manually clears the selected alarms Note that Net Inspector system alarms i e alarms that have the Message ID value in the range of 10000 15000 cannot be manually cleared Events cannot be manually cleared uncleared a Manually Unclear Unclears the selected alarms reverses the Manually Clear operation a Remove Cleared Alarms Removes all cleared alarms from the currently active tab of the Events window a Find Events Opens the Find Events dialog box which lets you search for alarms and events This command is available only in the Activ
22. right part of the status bar provides the following information from left to right a The server localization code e code page used by Net Inspector Server which is one of the following a EN English US a SL Slovenian This information is displayed only if the Show server localization option is enabled in the Client Preferences a Mem the Net Inspector Client used memory and the total available memory size e g 73MB 254MB This information is displayed only if the Show memory usage option is enabled in the Client Preferences a the username of the user connected to Net Inspector Server a S the name or address of the Net Inspector Server which the Client is connected to a The Net Inspector Server TCP port number that is used for communication with the Client 238 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Net Inspector Client Design Mode 29 NET INSPECTOR CLIENT DESIGN MODE 29 1 Purpose The design mode is a special Net Inspector Client mode of operation that facilitates the process of designing user views by allowing authorized users to have more than one user view active open at the same time and to copy objects between active user views The design mode cannot be used for monitoring and managing alarms and events 29 2 Opening To open Net Inspector Client in design mode you need to check the Design mode checkbox in the logon dialog box when logging on to Net Inspector Server Only us
23. to fit the window The Map Overview window contains a shaded rectangle current view which indicates what portion of the map is currently displayed in the active tab of the Maps window This is particularly useful if the Maps window Zoom in feature is used to display only a portion of the entire map By clicking and dragging the shaded rectangle in the Map Overview window the user can quickly display other parts the map in the Maps window Similarly by clicking a portion in the Map Overview window that is not covered by the shaded rectangle the rectangle moves to the clicked position and the corresponding portion of the map is shown in the currently active tab of the Maps window By using the Zoom in and Zoom out feature in the Maps window the shaded rectangle is automatically reduced or enlarged to indicate what portion of the map is currently shown in the Maps window Example Viewing the part of a map marked by the shaded rectangle in the Map Overview window default e Overview Jes applefaid2 a Fo a 131 CS oR pe 2 NW a ga Ae gg oi o 4 aU a D 3 kasiopea rsa FA A La y D e 2 28223 worm rsa a a a 2 R i a9 8 a 7 h BR a Sa enterprise rsa g H g a P Tga y 8 y a ay rsa 8900 3 appleraid1 LO 42 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Net Inspector Client Main Window 3 4 Events Window 3 4 1 Purpose It is used for viewing and finding alarms and events and for managing
24. will be assigned to discovered devices and affects the duration of the discovery operation if a device can be successfully queried using the first profile on the list this profile will be assigned to the managed object and the remaining profiles won t be used for discovering that device To not use a specific SNMP profile in discovery select it in the list and click the left arrow button at the bottom of the list This moves the selected profile to the Not used in discovery list Up button Moves the selected SNMP profile up in the Used in discovery list Down button Moves the selected SNMP profile down in the Used in discovery list LA 195 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Discovery Panel Dialog Box Advanced Discovery Settings Dialog Box Timeout input line Sets the timeout interval in seconds for ICMP ping and SNMP requests Retries input line Sets the retries count i e the number of times the ICMP ping and SNMP requests will be retransmitted after the first timeout occurs TTL input line Sets the time to live parameter that limits the lifetime of discovery packets to the specified number of hops This parameter is important for limiting the depth of the SNMP scan discovery operation Max queue size input line Specifies the maximum number of concurrent SNMP queries By using this parameter you can control the CPU usage and the speed of discovery By increasing this number the CPU load and spee
25. 8 Binding 7 OID is mcUnitPwrSupplyCnt 1 VALUE is 1 SYNTAX Gauge32 ae Binding 8 OID is mcUnitPwrSupply1Status 1 VALUE is off 2 SYNTAX Gauge32 OR E Binding 9 OID is mcUnitPwrSupply2Status 1 VALUE is undefined 0 SYNTAX Gauge32 E Binding 10 OID is snmpTrapEnterprise O VALUE is mediacon SYNTAX OBJECT IDENTIFIER EE 3 SNMP Version SNMPyv2c Simple Advanced E lt Back Uwe Finish Cancel Example of Trap To Alarm dialog box first screen Trap filter conditions can be specified by using the following controls in the first screen of the New Edit Trap To Alarm dialog box Rule Name input line Specifies the name of the trap to alarm rule It is recommended that you give a meaningful name to each rule e g it should denote which SNMP notification it applies to whether it triggers or clears alarm alarm text etc Specific OID input line Displays the OID that identifies the SNMP notification s to which the rule applies For SNMPv2c and SNMPv3 notifications this is value of the second variable binding snmpTrapOID 0 included in the notification PDU For SNMPv1 Traps this OID is constructed as follows lt enterprise OID gt 0 lt specific trap number gt where lt enterprise OID gt and lt specific trap number gt are values of the enterprise and specific trap fields in the SNMPv1 Trap PDU 4 130 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual
26. By clicking an interface in the list you can view its detailed statistics in a dedicated web page Interface Info This includes the interface utilization rate bit rate packet rate error rate queue drops for Cisco devices only and discard rate statistics with history IP SLA Statistics The IP SLA frame in the device Performance Statistics window displays the lists of IP SLA categories e g HTTP DNS Jitter VoIP etc and operations within categories source gt destination items as well as the current IP SLA measurements IP SLA statistics can only be monitored on Cisco devices that are properly configured LA 156 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Performance Statistics Window enabled IP SLA operations provided that the IP SLA monitoring is enabled in the polling profile assigned to those devices For more information on configuring IP SLA operations on Cisco devices please consult the Cisco documentation e g http www cisco com en US docs ios 12_4 ip_sla configuration guide hsoverv html The IP SLA frame in the Performance Statistics window displays the lists of IP SLA categories e g HTTP DNS Jitter VoIP etc and operations within categories source gt destination items configured on the given device It also displays the current IP SLA measurements Le round trip times RTT and for VolP also jitter from source to destination and vice versa Jitter SD DS packet loss from source to destin
27. Client is connected to is using i e EN for English US or SL for Slovenian Note that this determines the set of characters that can be used in Net Inspector Client and in the file system on which Net Inspector runs characters used for naming folders and files Characters from the English code page can be used regardless of the Net Inspector Server localization code page used while international characters can be used only if the server uses the corresponding code page For example if localization is SL only characters from the Slovenian and English code page may be used Show warning when input characters do not match server code page checkbox If this checkbox is checked a warning message box is displayed if you attempt to input characters not found in the English US code page or the code page used by Net Inspector Server if different from English US Show warning when disabling objects checkbox If this checkbox is checked a warning message box is displayed when you disable stop monitoring managed objects The warning message notifies you that by disabling objects their alarm information may be lost Show link traffic checkbox If this checkbox is checked the thickness and color of lines connecting managed objects automatically change visualizing the current connection status up or down and traffic data throughput and interface in out utilization The width of a connection line automatically incr
28. Di tada 158 11 Performance Manager Home Page WinNndOW scecccessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 159 TE Mei die 159 WT COSTING di dt Noe 159 LADA as cms 159 LR OO EE 159 LR NEE 160 TDS ii diia 160 TOMES A oi 161 DEVICES PAG Cocos ii osado aii 161 Alarms PARC asa 161 DOTVICES PARC abi 162 NetFlow POB 00 e 162 TEE 162 Report Dll dada 162 ele Seid Tutelle elle Le CN 163 TIROS Dri A A Ee 169 12 Create Filter ER EE 170 12 WEE 170 122 OPM sii ii 170 Ki re a NEE 170 T3 Find Events Dialog BOX iaa 176 a Ree 176 MS OSTA oes ess E E whe rca Gc elun E cer tus cepts caus agt ce Saeeoencnepadaetoaenne 176 13 S DSSCHOUON sind dll iii 176 14 Manage Event Attributes Dialog BOX ooooccccccccononnnccancncncnnnnnnnannnnnnccnnnnnennnnnnas 182 VA Kei ee 182 E TT EE 182 14 3 DGS Cri BON is 182 15 Manage Action Filters Dialog BOX ececccceesseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 183 TOT PUD OSG ui 183 Une E E TT 183 o eege ee Ze ee T 183 16 Network Discovery WIZAIG siccisciissccsestccacesetencrsdsnteanedencnanedcsenanesiueeasaueneesiasenene 184 TS UPR DOS at os 184 VG 2 OM SMUG dee illo a 184 16 3 Descrip Msi dado oa n 184 Welcome Sereen Step O eege AE Gelee en 184 Specify SNMP Profile s Step 1 sssssssssssssssssssssesssssssacsnsnsscenessenenseenessenessssesesenssessesesseassesseseencesscesseeseseseees 185 C7 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Introduction Configure Discovery Filter Step
29. Displays a list of configured UDP ports on which Net Inspector listens for incoming NetFlow and sFlow packets Add button Adds a new line to the Ports list and lets you enter the port number into it Add default button Adds the default NetFlow sFlow port 9991 to the Ports list Remove button Removes the selected port from the Ports list 8 6 Trap to Alarm Rules Panel Purpose It is used for managing rules that control how enterprise specific SNMP Trap and SNMP Inform notifications sent by network devices map to Net Inspector alarms Opening To open the Trap To Alarm Rules panel select the Tools Server Settings command and click on the Trap to Alarm Rules entry in the navigation tree Alternatively you can create a trap to alarm rule by right clicking an alarm that is based on a received enterprise specific SNMP Trap or Inform message in the Events window such alarms have Specific SNMP notification alarm message and severity level of Warning and selecting the Create Trap To Alarm Rule from the pop up menu Description Users with administrator access rights can use Trap To Alarm Rules panel to create edit and remove rules that control how enterprise specific SNMP Trap and SNMP Inform notifications sent by network devices map to Net Inspector alarms While the software automatically maps the generic SNMP notifications coldStart warmStart linkDown linkUp etc to Net Inspector ITU X 73
30. Displays the submap that contains the given object in a regular tab in the Maps window and selects the object 3 1 9 Change Profile Dialog Box To open the Change Profile dialog box select one or more objects in the Maps window and use the Tools Change Profile pop up command The Change Profile dialog box lets you assign a different poling profile and SNMP access profile to the managed object s selected in the Maps window These profiles must already exist in the Server Settings dialog box Profiles panel The dialog provides the following controls Polling profile checkbox and drop down list The drop down list lets you select among the existing polling profiles The chosen profile will be assigned to the selected managed objects Uncheck the Poling Profile checkbox if you don t want to change the polling profile for selected objects SNMP access profile checkbox and drop down list The drop down list lets you select among the existing SNMP access profiles The chosen profile will be assigned to the selected managed objects Uncheck the SNMP access profile checkbox if you don t want to change the SNMP access profile for selected objects OK Applies the changes and closes the dialog box Cancel Discards all changes and closes the dialog box 3 1 10Import from CSV File Dialog Box To open the Import from CSV File dialog box select the Add Import from CSV File pop up command in the Maps window and in the Import dialog
31. Export Events dialog box closely resembles the operating system s standard Save As dialog box Note that only information provided by the columns which are currently displayed will be exported a Export Filter to File Opens the Export Filter dialog box which lets you save the filter that is applied in the currently selected tab of the Events window to a file stored on Net Inspector Client computer This command is enabled only if a filter tab is selected in the Events window o Select All Ctrl A Selects all displayed alarms or events a Save as Default Layout Users with administrator access rights are authorized to use this command to save the layout of the currently active tab in the Events window as the default layout Default layout stores the information about the display status displayed hidden order and width of the columns displayed Once the default layout is defined saved it automatically applies to all tabs you create in the Events window The default layout is also automatically applied to all users when they connect to Net Inspector Server for the first time until they modify their layout in the Events window Therefore this command is typically used by administrators when configuring the system e when defining default layouts of Net Inspector Client main windows etc a Load Default Layout Loads and applies the default layout in the current tab of the Events window Default layout stores the information abo
32. Finish button Closes the New Chart dialog box and adds new chart name to the Chart Panel dialog box Back button Lets you return to the previous screen i e the Select source s screen Cancel button Discards all changes and closes the dialog box 8 9 2 Chart Tab Pop up Menu By opening a chart from the Chart Panel a new chart tab in the Maps window is created displaying the chart The graph lines show how the values of variables collected from managed object s change in time The chart is automatically updated LO 146 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Server Settings Dialog Box when the new values are retrieved How frequently the chart is updated depends on the polling interval set in the polling profile assigned to the source objects By right clicking inside the chart tab a pop up menu appears with the following commands Q Properties This command opens the chart Properties dialog box that lets you view and configure properties of the given chart a Show Points If this toggle command is selected the individual values retrieved from managed objects are depicted as scatter marks along the graph line a Fit in Window Automatically adjusts the chart zoom level to show the entire chart in the currently selected chart tab 8 9 3 Chart Properties Dialog Box The chart properties dialog box lets you view and configure the properties of the given chart To open this dialog box right click inside the
33. In addition the Graphics view displays also graphic elements Types of Objects This section describes the built in object types In addition new object types can be defined in the Server Settings dialog box Object Types panel a The following icons are used to represent managed objects devices IP generic IP device IP switch IP router IP server IP database La 17 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Net Inspector Client Main Window IP firewall IP equipment IP transmitter he IP printer b The following icons are used to represent different types of action objects actions that are performed on events Dx MAIL mail object CMD command object SMS SMS object OR The action objects represent actions e g e mail sending SMS sending command execution that are carried out by Net Inspector when events are triggered in order to notify users of events or to fix a detected network problem in an automated fashion Action objects can be placed onto maps and monitored in the same way as managed objects Although being primarily used for notifying users about alarms associated with managed objects action objects themselves trigger alarms when they fail to perform the designated action e g send an e mail Furthermore the status of the action object changes if any critical fault occurs while performing the action oper
34. Inspector will trigger an alarm when the processes CPU load exceeds the configured value for raising the alarm first input line and clear the alarm when the CPU load falls below the clear alarm threshold value second input line 9 112 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Server Settings Dialog Box Process memory If this checkbox is checked you can enter the processes memory usage threshold values in MB into the accompanying input lines This way Net Inspector will trigger an alarm when the processes memory usage exceeds the configured value for raising the alarm first input line and clear the alarm when the memory usage falls below the clear alarm threshold value second input line IP SLA checkbox and input line Note This option is available only in the WorkGroup and Enterprise Edition of MG SOFT Net Inspector application If this checkbox is checked the IP SLA statistics related will be monitored on Cisco devices that are properly configured and provide this information via SNMP Into the accompanying Poll every input line enter the polling interval in seconds for monitoring IP SLA statistics Furthermore you can set the threshold values for triggering and clearing alarms associated with the Cisco IP SLA metrics Collected information will be displayed in the IP SLA page in the Device Statistics window For more information on configuring IP SLA operations on Cisco devices please consult the Cisco document
35. L 186 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Network Discovery Wizard a Vendor If this condition type is selected you can enter the device vendor into the Value input line e g MG SOFT a Vendor OID If this condition type is selected you can enter the device vendor OID into the Value input line e g 1 3 6 1 4 1 1315 Operator Lets you select the operator e g is is not or contains Available operators depend on the type of condition selected Value Lets you select or enter the condition value Available and valid values depend on the type of condition selected Conditions panel The Conditions panel displays and lets you re configure existing filter conditions and logical operators connecting them Example of the Conditions panel contents active logical operator 1 level IP Range is from 192 168 2 1 to 192 168 4 254 two conditions combined with Class is not Workstation logical AND operator Editing Conditions For more information about editing existing conditions please consult the corresponding description of the Create Filter dialog box section Buttons a Add Adds the condition from the New condition toolbar to the Conditions panel a Edit Lets you edit the selected condition or operator a Remove Removes the selected condition or operator and all its child objects from the Conditions panel o AND Adds the logical AND operator to the
36. Panel dialog box lists all managed objects action objects system objects and alarm panel objects registered with Net Inspector and provides information about their current status active alarms and other details described below Users with administrator access rights are allowed to open this dialog box and add objects from this dialog to the Maps window by using the drag and drop technique use the Ctrl or Shift keys to select more than one object or the Ctrl A keys to select all objects before dragging them onto maps Make sure to unlock the map for editing before you try to add the objects onto it Adding objects onto maps is a part of the procedure of creating a user view see the User Views Panel section The Device Panel dialog box contains the following controls Show drop down list Is displayed directly below the title bar on the left side of the dialog box It lets you display only objects of the selected type Filter Bar drop down list Is displayed directly below the title bar on the right side of the dialog box It lets you enter text that functions as a filter i e it displays only those objects in the Device Panel dialog box that contain the entered text in SE EE columns To specify which columns will be taken into account click the filter symbol LZ zl and select desired columns from the drop down menu that appears columns are described in details below Then enter the text in to the accompanying input line which
37. SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Menus Save All Ctrl Shift S Saves the layout of all maps tabs in the currently active user view Revert to Saved Reverts the layout of the currently active map tab displayed in the Maps window to its last saved state Print Ctrl P Lets you print the contents of the Explorer window or the contents of the currently active tab of the Maps window depending on what is selected before you open the Print dialog box Export Opens the Export dialog box which lets you export the table displayed in the currently active tab of the Maps window Details view or in the currently active tab in the Events window to an HTML or CSV comma separated value file format The Export dialog box closely resembles the operating system s standard Save As dialog box Note that only information in the columns that are displayed will be exported Properties Opens the Properties window of the selected object or submap Exit Ctrl Shift X Closes the Net Inspector Client application 26 2 Edit Menu Cut Ctrl X Removes selection and puts it on the clipboard Copy Ctrl C Copies selection to the clipboard Paste Ctrl V Places the clipboard contents onto the Maps or Explorer window Duplicate Duplicates the currently selected object s in the Maps window Delete Del Deletes selection from the Maps or Explorer window Remove from Configuration Removes selected object s from the conf
38. Server Settings Dialog Box When you create a trap to alarm rule from a received specific SNMP notification the Specific OID value is automatically set to match the SNMP notification specific OID Note Specific OID value is the key condition that is checked first in received SNMP notification message Only if the specific OID value of a received notification matches the one specified in the trap to alarm rule the remaining conditions of the given rule trap filter are evaluated compared to notification attributes Edit button Opens the Specific OID dialog box that lets you edit or select the notification s enterprise specific OID from the MIB tree Name Displays the name of the specific OID as it resolves through loaded MIB modules For user friendlier SNMP notification viewing and handling you should load the private MIB module s that define relevant enterprise specific SNMP notifications into Net Inspector New condition toolbar The New condition toolbar lets you create conditions and add them to the trap filter one by one while the central section of the dialog box Conditions panel displays existing filter conditions and relations between them The Conditions panel displays a trap filter in form of a hierarchical tree where individual conditions are connected with logical operators AND OR is y 1 3 6 1 4 1 1315 op Enterprise OID e Variable Binding f f CONDITION OPER
39. Threshold value for interface The interface status has changed to down status exceeded 11005 Threshold value for memory The threshold value that is set in the polling usage exceeded profile for memory usage is exceeded 11006 Threshold value for processor The threshold value that is set in the polling load exceeded profile for processor load is exceeded 11007 Threshold value for storage usage The threshold value that is set in the polling exceeded profile for storage usage is exceeded 11200 Maximal number of objects is The maximal number of objects supported by the license is exceeded No new objects can be added to the system and some of the existing objects may be disabled Cannot compute the interface traffic values because the currently applied polling interval is too long compared to the interface nominal speed interface counters may roll over twice in one polling interval which makes computing traffic values unreliable 11501 Failed to compute interface traffic due to non positive ifSpeed value Cannot compute the interface traffic values because the interface nominal speed ifSpeed reported by the SNMP agent is zero or negative 12000 Link down Net Inspector Server has received a linkDown SNMP Trap or Inform notification message The SNMP agent on the given managed object reports that the status ifOperStatus of the interface identified by the iflndex variable binding has changed to
40. User View Dialog Box The Edit User dialog boxes is used for viewing and controlling which users are allowed to access the given user view The dialog box lists all existing users with checkboxes in front of them Check the checkbox to add assign the user view to the user To open this dialog box select an existing user view and click the Edit button in the User Views panel Name input line Displays the name of the user view and lets you change it Users list Lists all existing users in Net Inspector system by displaying their user names access rights user groups and descriptions If the checkbox in front of a user is checked the user is allowed to access open the given user view in other words the user view is assigned to the user You can control which users are allowed to access the user view by checking and unchecking the checkboxes displayed in front of users Assign All button Grants access to the given user view to all users assigns the user view to all users Unassign All button Denies access to the given user view to all users 4 103 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Server Settings Dialog Box Full propagation checkbox Enables propagating the number of alarms from all the subordinated maps up to the root of the given user view otherwise the number of alarms is propagated only one hierarchical level higher If enabled this setting can adversely affect the application performance
41. a MIB Browser shortcut for the Tools MIB Browser command E Manage Profiles shortcut for the Tools Server Settings Profiles Panel command Graphics Toolbar shortcut for the View Graphics Toolbar command a Show Performance Manager shortcut for the Tools Show Performance Manager command A Show Performance Statistics shortcut for the Show Performance Statistics pop up command ne Show NetFlow Statistics shortcut for the Show NetFlow Statistics pop up command 9 Network Discovery Wizard shortcut for the Network Discovery Wizard a Zoom out reduces the magnification of the currently active tab in the Maps window Graphics view 100 Zoom lets you set the zoom level magnification in percent of the currently active tab in the Maps window Graphics view a Zoom in increases the magnification of the currently active tab in the Maps window Graphics view by 20 G hi D D vd a View drop down menu lets you choose the view in the Maps window 237 28 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Status Bar a Graphics displays managed objects and submaps as icons o Details displays managed objects and submaps in a table view e Filter Bar drop down menu lets you filter objects in the currently active tab of the Maps window Details view Mame Type STATUS BAR The status bar is displayed at the bottom of the Net Inspector Client main window The
42. a R E A EE EAE E ENNER 104 8 2 Users TEE 105 PUPOSE EE 105 leese eege didas 105 POP UPS da dit 106 8 2 1 New User Dialog RETTEN 106 8 2 2 Te E DIalog BOX EE 107 8 2 3 Change Password Dialog BOX o scacronicnt iini od oO A aa ia 107 9 39 AKON EA EE 108 PUP OSC n E ick EEN E E e E AA as a TN S a 108 Description ed T EE Ke RKE EEN EEE E EE ae Rat 108 ET Fong aD EE 108 New Edit Polling Profile Dialog Bon AA 109 8 32 SNMP TaD E 116 New Edit SNMP Access Profile dialog Dos 117 Authentication Password or Key Privacy Password or Key dialog bon 118 US MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Introduction SA ACtOM FIGS PANO vrece anitiarn nny D eg eege n ani arinaa 120 ee 120 RE AA OR 120 8 4 1 New Edit Filter dialog box 120 8 5 Polling Engines ano ln dutta Ged Me ita 126 Pumps ie decai ss 126 Descriptio EE 126 New Edit Polling Engine dialog Don AA 126 8 6 Trap to Alarm Rules Panel ac iaa lidia dao 127 Pr ta 127 OP A cid 127 DDOSCHUPEOW is 127 8 6 1 New Edit Trap To Alarm Dialog BOX ooooonciccinccinoncccnnccccocccoconnnnarcncnncnc non narran cnn 129 VI A ERA ENT 129 EE 129 DESCAP ii babs cashes iia AE E 129 First Screen Trap Filter Screen cssssssssesssssssssssseseceseenssssesecesescessseucuescseecescecsesesesecesecucsescseceeecueseseneesaeeeeeeeees 129 Second Screen Alarm Mapping Screen 135 8 7 Event Attributes ln EE 137 at e E aR 137 Des NAINE EOE E EEE EEEE TEE 137 8 7 1 Ee E ea a a aa aa e aas 13
43. adds the new object to the selected map and configuration New object appears also in the Device Panel dialog box Cancel button Discards all changes and closes the dialog box 3 1 7 Connection Labels Dialog Box To open the Connection Labels dialog box double click a connection line with the selection tool amp in the Maps window Graphics view when map editing is enabled The Connection Labels dialog box lets you add edit and delete connection line labels and select the connection endpoint interfaces A connection line can have 3 labels left right and center label They are used for example for naming the connection and its endpoint interfaces BER MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Net Inspector Client Main Window The dialog provides the following controls Left label input line Lets you specify the left label for the connection e g interface address or name displayed on left hand side or upper section in vertical lines of the connection line Position drop down list Lets you select the position of the left label relative to the connection line left right center Auto rotation enabled left checkbox If this checkbox is checked the label text is automatically rotated aligned with the connection line if you reposition any of the two objects the line is connecting Center label input line Lets you specify the center label for the connection e g a link name displayed in the ce
44. alarms 3 4 2 Opening The Events window can be opened by selecting the View Events command or by clicking the Events toolbar button 3 4 3 Description The Events window is used for viewing alarms and events and for managing alarms Managing alarms includes acknowledging manually clearing as well as unacknowledging and manually unclearing alarms Additionally the Events window lets you view filtered active alarms in separate tabs as well as search for alarms and events that match the user specified conditions and display search results in separate tabs of the Events window Events Alarms and Active Alarms Net Inspector alarming system is based on events Net Inspector Server triggers and optionally logs all events that are essential for the monitoring of managed objects Net Inspector Server triggers events when it receives SNMP notification messages sent by the managed objects and when it detects network problems or changes in important parameters of managed objects functioning while polling the objects e g managed object is not responding SNMP agent on the managed object is not responding CPU load on the managed object is high etc Events are triggered also if problems occur within particular Net Inspector subsystems e g the configuration module triggers an event if Net Inspector Server cannot connect to the configuration database etc and if Net Inspector fails to perform the designated action e g send
45. all SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c queries sent by Net Inspector Write community input line The SNMP community name to be included into SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c Set requests sent by Net Inspector Trap community input line The community name included in SNMPv1 Trap or SNMPv2c Trap or Inform messages sent by the SNMP agents on managed devices SNMPv3 Settings frame The SNMPv3 security settings This frame is disabled if SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c protocol is selected in the SNMP version frame Security user name input line The name of the SNMPv3 USM user to be used for exchanging all SNMPv3 messages between Net Inspector and managed objects including SNMPv3 Trap and Inform messages sent by the managed objects Context name input line The name of the context in which the management information conveyed in SNMPv3 messages is accessed 117 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Server Settings Dialog Box Authentication protocol drop down list and Change Password Key button The drop down list lets you select the SNMPv3_ authentication protocol HMAC MD5 or HMAC SHA to be used for authenticating SNMPv3 messages sent on behalf of the given SNMPv3 user The Change Password Key button opens the Authentication Password or Key dialog box that lets you enter the authentication protocol password or key Privacy protocol drop down list and Change Password Key button The drop down list lets you select the SNMPv3 privacy protocol CBC DES or
46. an e mail for some reason Events trigger change and clear alarms Alarms are messages that indicate faults or conditions that could lead to faults on managed action and system objects An alarm can be active or cleared When an event triggers an alarm the alarm becomes and remains active until the event that clears this alarm is triggered Typically for every event that triggers an alarm there is also one that clears it e g event that is triggered when a managed object is not responding to queries triggers activates the Device is down alarm while the event that is triggered when the object starts responding again clears deactivates the Device is down alarm In addition to events which are triggered automatically as a result of important or abnormal occurrences detected on the managed objects or within the Net Inspector system itself there are also events that are triggered when users manage alarms i e acknowledge unacknowledge or manually clear unclear alarms These events change the state of alarms e g from active to manually cleared from new to acknowledged etc New alarms are active alarms which are not acknowledged Alarm acknowledging plays a confirming role i e by acknowledging alarms users declare that they are aware of them El 43 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Net Inspector Client Main Window Note Not all alarms can be manually cleared Net Inspector system alarms i e alarms t
47. and lets you edit the name of the managed object By default this is the host name of the managed object Type input line Displays the type of the managed object e g IP Address input line Displays and lets you edit the IPv4 or IPv6 address or the host name of the managed object This input line also provides a tooltip that displays the IP address of the managed object as well as the Copy IP Address pop up command which can be used for copying the IP address of the managed object to the clipboard Description input line Displays and lets you edit a short description of the managed object Net Inspector discovery operation enters the value of the sysDescr 0 object instance returned by the SNMP agent into this input line Polling engine drop down list Displays and lets you lets you select the polling engine used for polling the given device This is especially useful if there are multiple Performance Manager polling engines deployed in your network If you select a Performance Manager polling engine in this drop down list additional performance statistics about the given device will be available via the Show Performance Statistics command If the Built in engine option is selected then the given device is polled by Net Inspector Server and no performance history data is available for it Note This drop down list is enabled only when using Net Inspector Workgroup Enterprise or Carrier Edition which include the Performance Ma
48. as reported by the SNMP agent 17 4 1 Pop up Menu To display the pop up menu select one or more subnets devices or network interfaces in the Discovery results list and right click it To select more than one item hold down the mouse button and drag the mouse pointer over the items you want to select The pop up menu contains the following commands a Add Opens the Add dialog box that lets you specify to which user view and configuration you want to add the selected items If you use this command to add devices which are physically connected and located in the same subnet the command will add also connections between objects to the workspace Connections connection lines can be viewed in the Graphics view of the Maps window Added managed objects will appear also in the Device Panel dialog box a Expand Expands the hierarchical structure below the selected subnet or device if device has more than one interface a Collapse Collapses the hierarchical structure below the selected subnet or device if device has more than one interface La 197 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Manage Discovery Filters Dialog Box 18 MANAGE DISCOVERY FILTERS DIALOG BOX 18 1 Purpose It is used for viewing and managing discovery filters A discovery filter can be applied to a discovery operation to restrict its functionality so that it will discover only those network devices that match the filter conditions 18 2 Opening
49. auto configuration feature carry with the NEW label displayed in the upper left corner of the managed object icon This label can be hidden or displayed by selecting the respective managed object s and choosing the New Device toggle command from the pop up menu The Auto Configuration panel includes the following controls Add devices on received SNMP notifications from unknown sources to configuration checkbox and drop down list If this checkbox is checked the automatic adding of new managed objects devices based on received SNMP notifications is enabled In the accompanying drop down list select the configuration which the new devices will be added to Add devices to user view X map Y checkbox drop down list and input line If this checkbox is checked new managed objects devices are automatically added to the workspace i e to the user view X and map Y specified in the accompanying drop down list and input line respectively If no map is specified the managed object icons are placed to the root of the selected user view Add devices on received NetFlow streams from unknown sources to configuration checkbox and drop down list If this checkbox is checked the automatic adding of new managed objects devices based on received NetFlow and sFlow packets is enabled In the accompanying drop down list select the configuration which the new devices will be added to Add devices to user view X map Y checkbox drop dow
50. be configured by entering the ID and event type text values into corresponding input lines ID Event Type After configuring the event type attributes click the Apply button to apply the changes and exit the edit mode Edit button Puts the selected user defined event type in edit mode so its event type text can be edited After editing the event type click the Apply button to apply the change and exit the edit mode This button is disabled if a built in event type is selected Remove button Deletes the selected line event type Apply button Applies the changes in the edited line and exits the edit mode Cancel button Discards all changes in the edited line and exits the edit mode 4 140 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Server Settings Dialog Box 8 8 Object Types Panel Purpose The Object Types panel is used for viewing and managing types of objects used in Net Inspector managed objects actions objects and system objects Description The configuration in the Object Types panel determines in which object type and sub type categories the objects in Net Inspector fall into and what icons are used for displaying them Furthermore this panel lets you define new types of objects based on the built in base types and sub types that are variations of base types meaning that they have the same object type name as the base types e g IP but different vendor class and or icon property On
51. cleared by the system When specifying a user you can also specify the location IP address of the user who has managed the alarm in square brackets eg operator 192 168 10 120 If this condition type is selected you can enter an event state info into the Value input line e g admin 192 168 10 123 or Auto etc Operator Lets you select the operator e g is is not contains is greater or equal is smaller or equal etc Available operators depend on type of the condition selected Value Lets you enter or select the condition value Available and valid values depend on the type of the condition selected Conditions panel The Conditions panel displays and lets you re configure existing search conditions and logical operators connecting them 178 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Find Events Dialog Box Example of the Conditions panel contents la AND active logical operator first level E e inactive logical operator second level Source hpjd1 lt a condition 2 POR lt active logical operator second level e Severity Critical Severity Major Simple mode is enabled Expression equivalent to the search criteria search filter displayed above would be Source hpjd1 AND Severity Critical OR Severity Major Meaning Find all alarms events triggered by hpdj object whose severity levels are either C
52. connections between them Connection labels drop down list Lets you select what information will be displayed in connection labels i e labels on the ends of lines connecting managed objects You can choose to display the IP address or the name or the IP address and name of the endpoint network interface One can hide the connection labels later by clicking the Connection labels checkbox in the Graphics toolbar Display tunnel connections checkbox Check this checkbox if you want Net Inspector to display also the discovered tunnel connections between managed objects Advanced panel Timeout input line Sets the timeout interval in seconds for ICMP ping and SNMP requests Retries input line Sets the retries count i e the number of times the ICMP ping and SNMP requests will be retransmitted after the first timeout occurs TTL input line Sets the time to live parameter that limits the lifetime of discovery packets to the specified number of hops This parameter is important for limiting the depth of the progressive discovery operation Max queue size input line Specifies the maximum number of concurrent SNMP queries By using this parameter you can control the CPU usage and the speed of discovery By increasing this number the CPU load and speed will increase and vice versa LEO 189 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Network Discovery Wizard OK button Applies all changes and closes the dialog box
53. controls Chart name input line Lets you enter the name for the new chart This name will be listed in the Charts Panel Selected source s list Lists the names of managed objects that you want to include in the chart Add button Opens the Select Source dialog box The Select Source dialog box displays two panels the left panel contains the expandable map tree while the panel on the right displays all objects included in the map that is selected in the left panel The left panel also displays some properties of the listed objects To select a source object click the relevant map in the left panel choose the object on the right panel and click the OK button This will add the name of the selected source to the Selected source s list Repeat this procedure to add another source object to the list Remove button Deletes the selected source object from the list Next button Lets you proceed to the next step i e the Select chart variable screen Cancel button Discards all changes and closes the dialog box 2 The Select chart variable screen provides the following controls Select chart variable list Lists the names of variables that can be included into charts like CPU usage memory usage storage usage interface inbound outbound utilization rate and traffic The selected variable will be plotted on the same graph for all managed objects selected in the previous step that return this information
54. dialog that appears 226 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Print Dialog Box Page Setup button Opens the system standard Page Setup dialog box which lets you select among available print media set print orientation margins etc Fit to page checkbox Scales the output to fit the page size OK button Applies all changes sends the print job to the printer and closes the dialog box Cancel button Discards all changes and closes the dialog box 227 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Windows Dialog Box 25 WINDOWS DIALOG BOX 25 1 Purpose The Windows dialog box lets you view a list of all open Properties and Sub map Properties windows bring listed windows to the foreground and close listed windows 25 2 Opening To open the Windows dialog box use the Window Windows command 25 3 Description The Windows dialog box lets you view a list of all Properties and Sub map Properties windows currently open in Net Inspector Client bring listed windows to the foreground and close listed windows The Windows dialog box provides the following controls Open Windows list Displays a list of all Properties and Sub map Properties windows currently open in Net Inspector Client Activate button Activates brings to the foreground the window selected in the list of open windows Close Windows s button Closes the window s selected in the list of open windows Close button Cl
55. down This event is automatically cleared when the linkUp Trap or Inform message for the same interface is received 12001 Cold start Net Inspector Server has received a coldStart SNMP Trap or Inform notification message This signifies that the SNMP agent on the given managed object has reinitialized itself in a way that its configuration may have been altered 248 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Appendix 3 Event Message List and Description of Events 12002 Warm start Net Inspector Server has received a warmStart SNMP Trap or Inform notification message This signifies that the SNMP agent on the given managed object has reinitialized itself such that its configuration is unaltered 12003 Auth failure Net Inspector Server has received an authenticationFailure SNMP Trap or Inform notification message This signifies that the SNMP agent on the given managed object has received a SNMP message that is not properly authenticated e g contains a wrong community name 12004 Neighbor loss Net Inspector Server has received an egpNeighborLoss SNMP Trap or Inform notification message An egpNeighborLoss Trap signifies that an EGP neighbor for whom the sending protocol entity was an EGP peer has been marked down and the peer relationship no longer obtains 12005 Specific SNMP notification Net Inspector Server has received an enterprise
56. filter conditions are automatically added to the list and cleared alarms automatically disappear from the list by default a By selecting one or more objects in the Maps window and choosing the Alarms Active Alarms pop up command This command creates a new display filter tab in the Events window and displays a list of all active alarms on the selected objects in it The list of alarms is dynamic meaning that newly triggered alarms on the selected objects are automatically added to the list and cleared alarms automatically disappear from the list by default a By selecting one or more objects in the Maps window and choosing the Alarms History pop up command This command creates a new history tab LH in the Events window displaying a list of all alarms active and cleared that exist in the Net Inspector database for the selected object s The newly triggered alarms on the selected objects are automatically added to the list while cleared alarms do not disappear from the list a By loading a filter using the Events Load Filter command and selecting a filter either from the My filters repository which contains all previously saved display and search filters from the Action filters repository which contains all action filters available in the Manage Action Filters dialog box or from a file filters that have been previously saved to files When loading an action filter a new action filter tab DI appears in the Ev
57. for toggling displaying some information in the Maps window connection labels tooltips etc Graphic elements are shown only in the Graphics view Only users with administrator access rights are authorized to add and remove graphic elements to and from maps as well as set their properties and reposition object and submap icons on the maps To display or hide the Graphics toolbar use the View Graphics command The Graphics toolbar contains the following buttons D Saves the current map layout This button is disabled if no modifications were made to the given map E Discards all modifications and reverts the map layout to its last saved state Locks or unlocks the map for editing enables or disables the map Edit mode The map contents can be changed only if the map is unlocked for editing Edit mode is enabled If the Edit mode is disabled this button is in the locked state EI and all other buttons in the Graphics toolbar are disabled This means that no items can be added to the currently selected map tab in the Maps window and the existing graphic elements and icons in the Maps window cannot be edited repositioned or deleted Only users with administrator access rights can unlock a map for editing Selection tool When this button is selected the mouse cursor is represented with the normal arrow symbol and can be used for selecting objects on the map left click or left click and drag or displayi
58. icon a Enable Enables selected objects i e starts polling managed objects activates the action operations for action objects If a submap is selected this enables all action and managed objects included in the selected submap and its submaps This command has no effect on system objects a Disable Disables selected objects i e stops polling managed objects deactivates the action operation for action objects In case of a submap this command disables all action and managed objects included in the selected submap and its submaps This command has no effect on system objects a Alarms cascading menu a Active Alarms Creates a new tab in the Events window and displays all active alarms associated with the selected objects in it For the description of alarms and related commands please refer to the Events Window section of this manual a Acknowledge New Alarms Acknowledges all new alarms associated with the selected objects New alarms are active alarms that are not acknowledged a Find Events Opens the Find Events dialog box and automatically inserts appropriate search conditions for finding events or alarms associated with the selected objects a History Creates a new tab in the Events window and displays a history of alarms associated with the selected objects in it LA 26 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Net Inspector Client Main Window a Tools cascading menu a Ping Opens the Ping and SNMP Consol
59. if any critical problem in SMS message sending occurs As other action objects SMS objects function globally meaning that they send SMS messages when an event on any object registered with Net Inspector occurs not only when events on the objects included in the same user view occur By configuring and applying action filters one can restrict the message sending functionality of an SMS object in various ways For example you can setup a filter that will allow sending SMS messages only on events associated with particular objects or only on events of a particular severity level etc Action filters are configured in the Manage Action Filters dialog box and applied to SMS object in the Filters view of the SMS Properties window The SMS Properties window contains several views displaying different categories of parameters e g General Settings etc Users can switch between the views by selecting the corresponding entries from the category drop down list displayed in upper section of the SMS Properties window LA 76 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Action Object Properties Windows General View The General view contains the following controls Name input line Displays the name of the action object Type input line Displays the type of the action object SMS Description input line Displays a short description of the action object Active alarms frame Displays a summary and a list of active alarms asso
60. in Net Inspector each carrying the name of the configuration section it represents The Settings view displays the following information in read only mode Type input line Specifies the type of the configuration database Valid values are a Configuration file the configuration information is stored in a text file File input line The path to the configuration file 93 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual System Object Properties Windows Status bar The status bar is displayed at the bottom of the Properties window and provides information about the following object properties from left to right a The icon and name of the system object a The object ID of the system object a The current status of the system object EJ 94 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual System Object Properties Windows 7 3 SNMP Notification Properties Window 7 3 1 Purpose The SNMP Notification Properties window is used for viewing the configuration settings of the Net Inspector SNMP notification receiving subsystem and alarms associated with it 7 3 2 Opening The Mail Properties window can be opened by double clicking the SNMP notification system object icon in the Maps window or by right clicking the SNMP notification object and selecting the Properties pop up command 7 3 3 Description The SNMP notification object represents Net Inspector SNMP notification receiving subsystem This object trigger
61. input line The telephone number of the SMS center that will receive SMS messages via the TAP protocol and relay them to the recipients Sender number input line Optional telephone number of the SMS message sender Modem settings frame Serial port input line Specifies the serial port to which the mobile phone is connected 79 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Action Object Properties Windows Port settings button Opens the Port Settings dialog box that lets you set communication parameters for the given serial port as described below Port Settings dialog box Baud rate drop down list Lets you select the desired baud rate speed in bits per second for communication with the modem If unsure check with the device manufacturer for the best baud rate for your specific device Some devices can only communicate at a particular speed for example at 19200 bps Data bits drop down list Lets you select the number of data bits used for each character that is transmitted and received e g 8 Parity drop down list Lets you select the parity setting which controls the communication error checking e g none Stop bits drop down list Lets you select the stop bits setting e g 1 OK button Applies all modifications and closes the dialog box Cancel button Discards all modifications and closes the dialog box Filters View The Filters view contains the following controls Available fil
62. is configured Net Inspector Server collects the relevant data from the managed objects and stores the chart values and settings Network operators can connect to Net Inspector Server open the pre configured charts available in the Chart Panel and view the charts in Net Inspector Client Note that charts can be viewed only in the user view in which they were created The Chart Panel provides the following controls Charts list Lists the names of existing charts Add button Opens the New Chart dialog box which lets you create a new chart in two steps Open button Opens a new tab in the Maps window and displays the selected chart in it Remove button Deletes the selected chart 8 9 1 New Chart Dialog Box To open the New Chart dialog box click the Add button in the Chart Panel The New Chart dialog box lets you create a new chart in two simple steps In the first step you need to select the managed object s whose values you want to plot on the chart In the second step you need to select one of the predefined variables that will be plotted on the chart e g CPU load memory usage storage utilization interface utilization etc This dialog box lets you create a new chart in a wizard like fashion and has two screens the Select source s screen and the Select chart variable screen 145 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Server Settings Dialog Box 1 The Select source s screen provides the following
63. labels left right and center label used for e g naming the connection and its endpoint interfaces To edit labels or select endpoint interfaces double click the connection line with the selection tool Ej to open the Connection Labels dialog box and specify labels and interfaces in it Example of a connection line with labels and interface status nodes eth1 10 100 0 4 FaEth1 10 10 0 1 Router Router 2 To delete a connection line select it with the selection tool and press the Delete button on the keyboard To add a breakpoint to the connection line select the line at the desired point and drag the mouse pointer in any direction while holding down the mouse button Lets you add a line to the Maps window To add a line first click this button then click within the Maps window and hold down the mouse button while dragging the mouse pointer across the Maps window Release the mouse button at the point where you want the line to end Lets you add a rectangle to the Maps window To add a rectangle first click this button then click within the Maps window and hold down the mouse button while dragging the mouse pointer across the Maps window Release the mouse button when the size of the rectangle matches your preferences Lets you add an ellipse to the Maps window To add an ellipse first click this button then click within the Maps window and hold down the mouse button while dragging the mouse pointe
64. list a General Displays and lets you edit the name and icon of the selected map Q Propagation Displays the Propagation view that lets you configure propagation settings for the selected map Status bar Is at the bottom of the Submap Properties window and displays the name of the sub map and the propagated status of managed objects if propagation is not disabled General View The General view lets you view and set the name and icon for the selected map It provides the following controls Name input line Displays and lets you edit the name of the map LA 53 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Sub map Properties Window Icon drop down list Displays the name of the icon used for representing the given map By default the Submap icon is used To use a different icon for the given sub map select it from the Icon drop down list The Icon drop down list contains all icons currently available on Net Inspector Server computer in the Engine workspace icon folder To add a new icon copy two files of different sizes 16x16 pixels for the Details view and NxN pixels for the Graphics view to the Net Inspector Server computer in the Engine workspace icon folder and restart Net Inspector Server Both icon files must be saved in PNG file format and need to have the same name prefix with the _large suffix for the larger icon file e g name png and name_large png Propagation View The Pr
65. list of alarms when cleared EJ 99 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual System Object Properties Windows Status bar The status bar is displayed at the bottom of the Performance Manager Properties window and provides information about the following object properties from left to right a The icon and name of the system object a The object ID of the system object a The current status of the system object 4 100 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Server Settings Dialog Box 8 SERVER SETTINGS DIALOG BOX Purpose The Server Settings dialog box is used for configuring the server specific settings e g the users that can connect to the Net Inspector Server the user views that they have access to SNMP and polling profiles trap to alarm rules and other server related settings Opening To open this dialog box select the Tools Server Settings command Note Only users with administrator access rights are authorized to open this dialog box to view and change the server settings Description The left section of the Server Settings dialog box contains a navigation tree with several entries Depending on the entry selected in the navigation tree different panel and buttons are displayed in the right section of the Server Settings dialog box In addition the following button is displayed at the bottom of the Server Settings dialog box Close button Closes the dialog box 8 1
66. other conditions To edit a variable binding condition first double click the relevant condition line in the Conditions panel or click the Edit button in the right section of the dialog box and then click the Edit button that appears in the condition line to display the Binding Editor dialog box where you can edit variable binding condition Buttons a Add Adds the condition from the New condition toolbar to the Conditions panel In Advanced mode the condition is added to the selected branch in the filter tree a Edit Lets you edit the selected condition or operator Operators can be modified only in Advanced mode LO 134 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Server Settings Dialog Box a Remove Removes the selected condition or operator and all its child objects from the Conditions panel a AND Adds the logical AND operator to the selected filter branch This button is enabled only in Advanced mode o OR Adds the logical OR operator to the selected filter branch This button is enabled only in Advanced mode o Next button Lets you proceed to the second screen o Cancel button Discards all changes and closes the dialog box Second Screen Alarm Mapping Screen The second screen of the New Edit Trap To Alarm dialog box is used for configuring alarm mapping Alarm mapping controls the resulting alarm attributes i e the alarm severity level the alarm message and optionally alarm source info alarm propert
67. permitted to open this dialog box to view and manage discovery operations as well as add discovered devices and their interconnections to the workspace and to the Device Panel dialog box Discovery operation is a procedure that systematically scans the network for network devices and their inter connections by means of ICMP ping and or SNMP queries The search is performed in accordance with the user specified discovery parameters Net Inspector supports three different network discovery methods strategies a local discovers the network devices and their connections within the local subnet a range discovers the network within the specified ranges of IP addresses Q progressive discovers the network by means of the progressive SNMP based network scan operation that starts scanning a single SNMP device and progressively discovers its neighbors and subnets they belong to The depth of a progressive discovery operation is limited by the TTL time to live parameter that limits the lifetime of discovery packets to the configured number of hops Discovered devices and their connections within subnets can be added to Net Inspector workspace i e selected user view either automatically or manually by the user Furthermore a network discovery operation can be scheduled to run repeatedly in user defined intervals and each time automatically add newly discovered devices to the selected user view More than one discovery operation can exist
68. reasons invalid SNMP agent version or incorrect SNMP Set community string used 10004 Invalid address or DNS error Specified name of the object cannot be resolved through the DNS Possible reasons invalid DNS name entered DNS server not reachable 10040 Invalid filter name No filter is assigned to the action object 10041 Extension process is not running The Net Inspector extension process associated with the object e g mgmail process for Mail objects is not running The corresponding actions cannot be executed Net Inspector will automatically attempt to restart the extension process and if successful this event will be cleared 10042 Invalid settings Settings for the action object are invalid or missing 10043 Modem timeout Modem connection has timed out SMS object Possible reasons incorrect settings destination not reachable 10044 Sending messages is temporarily disabled due to full buffer The message queue buffer for an action object is full and all new outgoing messages are being discarded 10045 Failed to run process The process to be started by the Command object is not running Possible reasons insufficient user rights 10050 Invalid command line The file to be run by the Command object does not exist Possible reasons invalid command line 10101 Alarm panel client is down Remote alarm panel client is not con
69. same manner as in the Events window The Configuration system object triggers the following events and alarms MessagelD Severity Message 10201 Critical Failed to load configuration database 10202 Critical Failed to connect to configuration database 10203 Critical Failed to read from configuration database Pop Up Menu To display the pop menu right click one or more alarms in the list of active alarms The pop up menu contains the following commands a Details Opens the Event Details window which displays details of the selected alarm This window display the same information as the Event Details sub window a Add Comment Opens the Add Comment dialog box that lets you enter or edit comment for the selected alarms Comments are displayed in the Comment column a Akcnowledge Acknowledges the selected alarms By acknowledging alarms users declare that they are aware of the alarms Acknowledged alarms are not shown in the alarm balloons a Unacknowledge Unacknowledges the selected alarms reverses the Acknowledge operation a Manually Clear Manually clears the selected alarms Note that Net Inspector system alarms i e alarms that have the Message ID value in the range of 10000 15000 cannot be manually cleared LA 92 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual System Object Properties Windows a Manually Unclear Unclears the selected alarms reverses the Manually Clear operation a Remove Cleared Alarms Removes al
70. specific SNMP Trap or Inform notification message lts details including variable bindings are displayed under the Event Details sub window SNMP Notification tree 12006 Unknown SNMP notification Net Inspector Server has received an SNMP Trap or Inform notification message that has an invalid format 14000 Action test Reserved for future use 14001 Failed to send message Send e mail or SMS message action could not be performed Possible reasons E mail server rejected the message 15000 HTTP service failed HTTP service is not responding to queries within the given time frame or a different response than expected has been received e g an error message 15001 SMTP service failed SMTP service is not responding to queries within the given time frame or a different response than expected has been received 15002 FTP service failed FTP service is not responding to queries within the given time frame or a different response than expected has been received 15003 DNS service failed DNS service is not responding to queries within the given time frame or a different response than expected has been received 15004 POP3 service failed POPS service is not responding to queries within the given time frame or a different response than expected has been received 15005 IMAP service failed IMAP service is not responding to queries within the given
71. still playing Repeat until acknowledged or cleared radio button If this option is selected the sound is played repeatedly for each alarm until the alarm is acknowledged or cleared 217 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Client Preferences Dialog Box Sound type frame System beep radio button If this option is selected the default system beep is played Sound file input line Lets you choose the sound file wav au to be played on alarms Tools Panel This panel lets you configure user defined commands actions that start external programs and optionally pass managed object details like the IP address etc as command line parameters to external programs User defied commands are added to the Tools section of the pop up menu for managed objects in the Maps window To execute a user defined command right click a managed object in the Maps window and choose the Tools name of user defined command command from the pop up menu that appears The Tools panel provides the following controls Tools list Lists the names of existing user defined commands actions Add button Opens the Custom Action dialog box which lets you create and configure a new user defined command action Edit button Opens the Custom Action dialog box which lets you modify the selected user defined command action Remove button Deletes the selected user defined command action By removing a command it disappe
72. sysUpTime 0 OID value at the time of sending the notification Message type Displays the type of received SNMP notification message Trap or Inform Protocol version Displays the SNMP protocol version of the notification Transport Displays the transport protocol used to convey the notification message Agent address port Displays the IP address of the agent that has sent the SNMP notification and the port from which the notification has been sent Manager address port Displays the IP address of the manager Net Inspector Server that has received the SNMP notification and the port on which the notification has been received LA 51 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Net Inspector Client Main Window Community Displays the community name included in the SNMP notification message except for SNMPvV3 notifications SNMPv1 agent address only for SNMPv1 Traps Displays the address of the agent associated with the received SNMPv1 Trap notification Enterprise only for SNMPv1 Traps Displays the OID of the enterprise associated with the received SNMPv1 Trap notification Security parameters only for SNMPv3 notifications Security user name The name of the SNMPv3 USM user on behalf of which the notification was sent Security engine ID The SNMP engine ID value used for the notification reception Context name The name of the context in which the management information conveyed in SNMPv3 notification is acces
73. the changes i e it loads or unloads depending on the command you selected MIB module s into Net Inspector Server and Client Cancel button Closes the dialog and discards all changes 8 11 Auto Configuration Purpose It is used for controlling the Net Inspector auto configuration feature Auto configuration automatically adds new managed objects to the system and starts monitoring them if Net Inspector receives an SNMP Trap or SNMP Inform notification message or a NetFlow or sFlow message from unknown devices i e devices that were previously not included in the Net Inspector configuration Auto configuration is a type of passive device discovery where devices are discovered by receiving SNMP notifications and NetFlow sFlow packets from the network This feature may be used as an alternative to the active network discovery functionality or in combination with it e g to discover some devices through the active discovery operation and other through the passive method received SNMP notifications and NetFlow packets 4 149 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Server Settings Dialog Box Description Users with administrator access rights can enable disable and configure the Auto configuration settings to control adding new devices to the system based on received SNMP notification messages and NetFlow sFlow streams Managed objects representing devices that have been automatically added to the system by the
74. the network by means of Ping ICMP Echo requests Discovery Panel Opens the Discovery Pane dialog box which lets you view and manage discovery operations Manage Discovery Filters Opens the Manage Discovery Filters dialog box which lets you view and configure discovery filters Show Performance Manager Displays the Performance Manager Home Page window User Preferences Opens the User Preferences dialog box which lets you view and configure user specific preferences Client Preferences Opens the Client Preferences Dialog Box which lets you view and adjust certain aspects of Net Inspector Client behavior and look and feel to your preferences Server Settings Opens the Server Settings Dialog Box which lets you view and configure the server specific settings MIB Browser Opens the MIB Browser window which lets you explore the graphical MIB tree and query devices on the network via the SNMP protocol 26 7 Window Menu Close All Closes all open windows listed in the Windows dialog box Windows Displays the Windows dialog box which lets you view activate and close Properties and Sub map Properties or Performance Statistics windows that are currently open in Net Inspector Client The menu section below the separation line displays the names of up to 10 open Properties Sub map Properties or Performance Statistics windows You can quickly activate bring to the foreground any listed window by selecting its name f
75. the selected object the object is included in the last submap displayed within each branch To hide the References panel click the X button in its title bar Enable Enables selected objects i e starts polling managed objects and activates the action objects This command does not affect the system objects Disable Disables selected objects i e stops polling managed objects and deactivates the action objects This command does not affect the system objects 205 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Device Panel Dialog Box a Tools cascading menu a Ping Opens the Ping and Traceroute Console window and starts pinging the selected managed object a Remove Device Removes the selected objects that are marked as deleted displayed with strikethrough font from the dialog box o Export Opens the Export Device Panel dialog box which lets you export the table displayed in the Device Panel dialog box to an HTML or CSV comma separated value file format The Export Device Panel dialog box closely resembles the operating system s standard Save As dialog box Note that only information shown in columns that are currently displayed will be exported a Show Objects Statistics Opens the Objects Statistics message box which displays the total number of objects in the system the number of enabled objects in the system and the number of removed objects i e objects marked for deletion 19 5Status bar The D
76. time frame or a different response than expected has been received 249 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Appendix 3 Event Message List and Description of Events 15006 HTTPS service failed HTTPS service is not responding to queries within the given time frame or a different response than expected has been received 15007 NNTP service failed NNTP service is not responding to queries within the given time frame or a different response than expected has been received 15008 MySQL service failed MySQL service is not responding to queries within the given time frame or a different response than expected has been received 15009 Telnet service failed Telnet service is not responding to queries within the given time frame or a different response than expected has been received 15010 LDAP service failed LDAP service is not responding to queries within the given time frame or a different response than expected has been received 15011 MsSQL service failed MsSQL service is not responding to queries within the given time frame or a different response than expected has been received 15012 SSH service failed SSH service is not responding to queries within the given time frame or a different response than expected has been received 15013 LPD service failed LPD service is not responding to queries within the given time frame or a different response than
77. to register port for SNMP Cannot register a new port for receiving notifications SNMP notifications Possible reasons port is already used by another application 10232 Receiving SNMP notifications is The SNMP notification reception buffer is full temporarily disabled due to full buffer and all new incoming SNMP notifications are being discarded 247 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Appendix 3 Event Message List and Description of Events 11500 exceeded Failed to compute interface traffic due to too long polling interval 10233 Receiving SNMP notifications is All new incoming SNMP notifications are temporarily disabled due to SNMP being discarded Possible reasons sub system failure MG SOFT SNMP Trap service is not running 11000 Threshold value for interface The threshold value that is set in the polling inbound utilization exceeded profile for inbound interface utilization is exceeded 11001 Threshold value for interface The threshold value that is set in the polling outbound utilization exceeded profile for outbound interface utilization is exceeded 11002 Threshold value for interface The threshold value that is set in the polling inbound error rate exceeded profile for inbound error rate is exceeded 11003 Threshold value for interface The threshold value that is set in the polling outbound error rate exceeded profile for outbound error rate is exceeded 11004
78. tree the MIB module that defines this object is not loaded in Net Inspector You can load and unload MIB modules in MIB Modules panel Tools Server Settings MIB Modules a Contact Queries the SNMP agent on the managed object by means of an SNMP GetNext request and displays result in the Results panel If the queried SNMP agent responds to the query within a set timeframe this operation returns the value of the first OID in lexicographical order that is implemented in the SNMP agent typically sysDescr 0 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 1 0 a Get Sends an SNMP Get request to the SNMP agent on the managed object to retrieve the value of the object instance selected in the MIB tree The result is displayed in the Results panel a Get Next Sends an SNMP GetNext request to the SNMP agent on the managed object to retrieve the value of the object instance that lexicographically follows the MIB object selected in the MIB tree The result is displayed in the Results panel a Walk Performs the SNMP Walk operation from the selected node in the MIB tree e successively queries all object instances within the given OID subtree to retrieve their values For example if you select the system MIB tree node OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 and click this button the software will query the MIDI system subtree and display returned values i e the name or OID syntax and value of every retrieved object instance or an error message e g a timeout 213 MG SOFT
79. user views that are assigned to them For more information on creating user views in the design mode please see the Net Inspector Client Design Mode section The complete procedure of creating a user view and assigning it to a user includes the following steps 1 Creating a new user view in the Server Settings dialog box User Views panel 2 Assigning a user view to one or more users in the User Views panel 3 Switching into the new user view e g by using the User Views panel a new empty workspace is displayed 4 Adding objects to the new user view from the Device Panel dialog box and organizing those objects into maps and submaps in the Maps and Explorer windows The User Views panel includes the following controls User Views list Displays the list of existing user views Add button Opens the New User view dialog box which lets you create a new user view and assigned it to users Edit button Opens the Edit User view dialog box Remove button Deletes the selected user view Open button Activates switches into the selected user view 8 1 1 New User view dialog box The New User View dialog box lets you create a new user view and assign it to existing Net Inspector users To open this dialog box click the Add button in the User Views panel This dialog box provides the following controls Name input line Lets you enter a name for the new user view Users list Lists all existing us
80. when the device starts responding again the Device is down alarm is cleared Note 2 Only active alarms are displayed in the Alarms page Every line in the Alarms list represents one alarm Alarms provide the following information Time Date and time when the alarm occurred Description Short description of the alarm Severity Severity of the alarm Device Name of the device associated with alarm Source Info Additional information about the source of alarm Value Value of the threshold variable for threshold alarms only Alarms are colored according to their severity levels LA 161 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Performance Manager Home Page Window Informational Cyan Warning Yellow Minor Dark yellow Major Orange Critical Red Oooco Services page The Services page displays a list all monitored services on devices by category DNS HTTP IMAP SSH and a list of services with the status of critical Critical status means that the service is not available By clicking a service on the list more detailed statistics for the selected service is displayed service availability and round trip time RTT NetFlow page The NetFlow page displays a list of all configured NetFlow sFlow source devices if any and the Top N NetFlow traffic reports for a configurable time frame for all NetFlow sFlow sources By expanding and clicking the individual subentries in the TopN reports N is
81. which contains all previously saved display and search filters from the Action filters repository which contains all action filters available in the Manage Action Filters dialog box or from a file filters that have been saved to a file in previous versions of Net Inspector a OK Applies the filter and display the filtered alarms in a new tab in the Events window a Cancel Discards all changes and closes the Create Filter dialog box 4175 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Find Events Dialog Box 13 FIND EVENTS DIALOG BOX 13 1 Purpose It is used for searching for alarms and events 13 2 Opening To open the Find Events dialog box select the Event Find Events command or click the B Find button in the Events window 13 3 Description The Find Events dialog box lets you search for those alarms or events that match the search filter Search filters are configured in the same manner as display filters in the Create Filter dialog box The result of a search operation is displayed in a separate tab in the Events window A search filter can be created by using the following controls in the Find Events dialog box Name input line Specifies the name of the Events window tab to display the search results in If any object is selected in the Maps window before you open the Find Events dialog box this input line contains the name s of the selected object s Time frame drop down list Lets
82. 02 00 00 00 2010 10 06 00 00 00 2010 11 01 00 00 00 2010 10 06 00 00 00 2010 10 01 00 00 00 The Date Time format is YYYY MM DD HH mm ss Default time period LA 153 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Performance Statistics Window Sample Interval drop down list Lets you select the sampling interval for data displayed in graphs and tables on the page The sampling interval determines the granularity of the data shown i e how many bars in graphs or lines in tables are shown per given time period For example if the time period is set to Last 60 minutes and the sample interval is set to 5 minutes the graphs will display 12 bars within one hour interval 60 5 12 The graph bars and values in tables display the average values within the sampling intervals To use a different sampling interval select a corresponding entry from the drop down list SI PODODO 1 Minute 5 Minutes 30 Minutes 1 Hour 6 Hours 12 Hours 1 Day Note About data aggregation and values displayed For all metrics shown in device performance web pages e g response time CPU load interface utilization MOS etc the collected values are being gradually aggregated meaning that from individual readings average values are being calculated and displayed in graphs and tables depending on the time period and the sampling interval set By default the following aggregation model is used for performance data a different model is use
83. 232 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Menus 26 5 Map Menu Edit Mode Ctrl Shift E Enables or disables the Edit mode for the map tab currently selected in the Maps window Graphics view If the Edit mode is disabled the map cannot be edited All commands described below except the Grid command are enabled only if the Edit mode is enabled Relayout Opens the Relayout dialog box which lets you automatically re arrange the icons in the currently active tab of the Maps window into the star or mesh network topology layout if the icons are connected with connection lines or arrange the icons onto a gridline if the icons are not connected The Relayout dialog box also lets you arrange the icons into alphabetically sorted layout If the Only selected checkbox is checked in the Relayout dialog box only the selected icons will be repositioned If the Ignore unconnected checkbox is checked in the Relayout dialog box the unconnected icons will not be repositioned i e aligned to a grid Insert Line Lets you draw a line in the Maps window by clicking and holding down the mouse button while dragging the mouse pointer across the Maps window Release the mouse button at the point where you want the line to end Insert Rectangle Lets you draw a rectangle to the Maps window by clicking and holding down the mouse button while dragging the mouse pointer across the Maps window Release the mouse button when the size of the recta
84. 3 alarms the rules for mapping enterprise specific SNMP notifications can be configured manually This allows you to configure the alarm attributes alarm message severity level alarm source information etc to be displayed by Net Inspector when it receives a particular type of enterprise specific SNMP notification Note If no trap to alarm mapping rules are configured Net Inspector displays the same alarm message and severity level for all alarms based on received enterprise specific SNMP notifications regardless of the type of notification and importance of the condition reported by the notification Such alarms have Specific SNMP notification alarm message and severity level of Warning To differentiate among such alarms one needs to inspect the details of the original SNMP notification included in alarms which can be viewed in the Event Details sub window under the SNMP notification section La 127 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Server Settings Dialog Box In general whenever applicable one should create two trap to alarm rules for each type of alarm condition one that triggers the alarm and one that clears it For example if a device sends an SNMP Trap when the chassis temperature raises above the normal level and another SNMP Trap when the temperature drops back to normal you should create two trap to alarm rules one that will raise the alarm set the alarm severity level to other than Cleared
85. 8 EA CAUSE TAD ii aa 139 8 753 EVENT TYPO Taiana 140 8 9 Object Types Panel ia 141 E 14 DDO SCHUPULON Visit toes ces o ys ESA decida stoves case sas vases ca tea do IAS gas woven O a EEE 14 New Edit Object Type dialog box 144 8 9 Chat Panels sn ee ree er ee eee cee ia 145 PUDO Costera iii 145 DOS CLUPUION visa Seeerei eas ace acd ease tasnaeaud E eege 145 8 9 1 New Chart Dialog BOX AEN 145 8 9 2 Chart Tab Pop Up Mem 146 8 9 3 Chart Properties Dialog BOX 1 ccccscccsseecceneecenesesneeseneeeceeeessaessenaecseneecsesssaassseneessnetessnaees 147 8 10 MIB Modules Panel MEN 148 Pus AEA EEEE EEES 148 DES A id EEAS 148 RE e EE 149 EE 149 Description user 150 9 Manage Polling Engines Dialog BOX cccconnnnnnnncccccncnccnnnnnnnnanccnnnnnnnnnnnnnanannnnns 151 CR WE ie 151 9 12 OPE tt a ti ees deers 151 OS DESCNPLION ET 151 10 Performance Statistics WiNdO0W oonmnncccnnniccccnnnnncccccnnnnanncnnnnnnnanc nn nnn nac cnn nro 152 E Nee 152 T02 Opening ee 152 UE lte asia da 152 TOBA TOO EE 153 103 2 ica 153 Device Perjormance Toolbar mieria a nea is aire 153 06 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Introduction System Information and Respon efventerg ENEE 155 Memory and Processor Usage Stottettcg ENEE 155 SOFA Be RE 155 KE 156 a ee 156 Network Interfaces StQustics A ies its hate a Dates EE ele 156 PESAS atea 156 Custom AS A ia 157 Device Related AlarMS ccconicinonininncni cat isis EE SEU EES 157 TOD STAUS
86. ATOR VALUE TYPE This toolbar lets you create a filter condition by selecting the condition type operator and value from the corresponding drop down lists For the variable Binding condition type more than one property can be set as explained below Once the condition is configured you can add it to the filter by clicking the Add button in the right section of the dialog box Added conditions appear in the Conditions panel below the New condition toolbar Condition type drop down list Specifies the type of the condition You can select among the following types of conditions o SNMP Version Lets you configure a filter condition that will let through only notifications of particular SNMP protocol version e SNMPv1 Traps or SNMPv2c Traps and Informs or SNMPv3 Traps and Informs a Enterprise Lets you configure a filter condition that will let through only SNMP notifications with a particular enterprise OID specified in the accompanying input line If the relevant MIB module is loaded click the OID button next to this input line to open the Select OID dialog box and select the desired object 131 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Server Settings Dialog Box from the MIB tree The OID of the selected object will be inserted into the OID input line This OID will be compared with the value of the enterprise field in the SNMPv1 trap messages or with the value of the snmpTrapEnterprise 0 variable binding inclu
87. CFB AES 128 to be used for encrypting SNMPv3 messages sent on behalf of the given SNMPv3 user The Change Password Key button opens the Privacy Password or Key dialog box that lets you enter the privacy protocol password or key Do not localize authentication and privacy keys checkbox If this checkbox is checked the software uses non localized authentication and privacy keys OK button Applies all changes and closes the dialog box Cancel button Discards all changes and closes the dialog box Authentication Password or Key Privacy Password or Key dialog box The Authentication Password or Key and the Privacy Password or Key dialog boxes have the same appearance The provide the following controls Enter password radio button If this option is selected you can specify the authentication or privacy security key by entering the password into the accompanying input lines Net Inspector will compute the security key for the SNMPv3 authentication or privacy protocol from the given password according to the algorithm defined in the User based Security Model USM for version 3 of the Simple Network Management Protocol document RFC 3414 Password input line Lets you enter the authentication or privacy password Retype input line Lets you confirm the password by re entering it Show typing checkbox If this checkbox is checked the entered password characters are displayed in the Password and Retype input lines instead of m
88. Client Main Window A Beep enables or disables emitting audible signals system default beep upon triggering alarms Load Filter opens the Load Filter dialog box which lets you select a previously saved display or search filter and apply it to the currently active tab of the Events window The Load Filter dialog box lets you select the filter either from the My filters repository which contains all previously saved display and search filters from the Action filters repository which contains all action filters available in the Manage Action Filters dialog box or from a file filters that have been previously saved to files EI Save Filter lets you save the display or search filter that is applied in the currently selected tab of the Events window for later use The filter will be saved to the My filters repository which is stored on the Net Inspector Server computer This way the same user can later load the filter This button is disabled if no filter of search tab is selected in the Events window EL The central part of the Events window displays the contents of the currently selected tab Every alarm or event in the Events window is displayed in a separate row Details about the alarms events are displayed in the following columns you can display or hide individual columns by clicking their names in the column selector E displayed on top of the vertical scrollbar of the Events window x Cleared ch
89. General view of the Properties window to a HTML or CSV comma separated value file format The Export Events dialog box closely resembles the operating system s standard Save As dialog box Note that only information provided by the columns which are currently displayed will be exported Select All Ctrl A Selects all displayed alarms Table Options cascading menu a Keep Cleared Alarms toggle menu option If this option is checked alarms that are cleared by Net Inspector remain listed in the current view otherwise they automatically disappear from the current list of alarms when cleared Q Keep Manually Cleared Alarms toggle menu option If this option is checked alarms that are manually cleared by the user remain listed in the current view otherwise they automatically disappear from the current list of alarms when cleared LJ 96 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual System Object Properties Windows Settings View The Settings view provides the following read only information acquired from the snmp notifications section of the Net Inspector Server initialization file Assign SNMP notifications to managed objects checkbox Enables or disables assigning received SNMP Trap and Inform notification messages to corresponding managed objects If this checkbox is checked Net Inspector checks the address from which the SNMP notification has been sent and tries to assign the received SNMP notification to t
90. If a sub map is selected this command opens the BEIS MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Net Inspector Client Main Window sub map Properties window which lets you view and configure the map propagation settings a Show Performance Statistics Note This command is disabled in the Net Inspector LITE edition If a managed object is selected this command opens the Performance Statistics window displaying the performance statistics of the selected managed object provided that this object is being polled by a Performance Manager polling engine PM polling engine can be set in the device s Properties dialog box General view This command is available only for managed objects e objects representing network devices a Show NetFlow Statistics Note This command is disabled in the Net Inspector LITE edition On a managed object that is set as a NetFlow source this command displays the Performance Manager NetFlow page for the given NetFlow sFlow source e g a router The NetFlow page contains the TopN NetFlow sFlow traffic reports for the given NetFlow source for all network interfaces on this source By expanding and clicking the individual subentries in the Top N reports more detailed statistics for the selected item e g conversation application protocol etc is shown This command is available only for managed objects that are set as the NetFlow sources in Net Inspector indicated by a NF sign on the object
91. Information memory usage CPU load Storage Information and Process information process name path PID CPU and memory consumption provided that monitoring of all these metrics is enabled in the polling profile that is assigned to the given device If any custom statistics are configured and enabled in the associated polling profile and in the device page layout this page displays also custom statistics polled on the given device In addition to displaying the last retrieved device performance values this report page shows also history graphs for the response time packet loss memory usage and CPU load variables where applicable To view more detailed graphs and tables for any metric click on its graph chart in the device performance page The bottom section of the device performance page displays all device related alarms if any The Performance Statistics window contains the toolbar web browser and status bar components as follows LA 152 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Performance Statistics Window 10 3 1 Toolbar The toolbar is displayed directly below the title bar and contains the following buttons Back button This button lets you to go to the previously visited web page Forward button This button lets you browse to the next web page in the browse history Refresh button Re loads the current web page 10 3 2 Web Browser This frame occupies the area between the toolbar and the
92. Inspector Server the client is connected to In this case the About dialog box displays the product licensing information like the license serial number and supported edition of the software Furthermore this dialog box also displays the maximal and current number of concurrent client connections the maximal and current number of devices managed by the Net Inspector Server as well as the list of all connected Performance Manager polling engines and the number of the objects monitored by each polling engine 236 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Toolbar 27 TOOLBAR The toolbar which is displayed below the menu bar in the Net Inspector Client main window contains a group of buttons that provide quick access to a series of most common menu commands You can get a brief description of the operation behind each toolbar button in a tooltip by placing the mouse pointer on the toolbar button without clicking The toolbar buttons are A New connection shortcut for the File Connect command A Disconnect shortcut for the File Disconnect command A Reconnect shortcut for the File Reconnect command a Events shortcut for the View Events command led Explorer shortcut for the View Explorer command Ej Map Overview shortcut for the View Map Overview command E Device Panel shortcut for the View Device Panel command SS Ping and SNMP Console shortcut for the Tools Ping and SNMP Console command
93. L SNMP protocol version of notification SENTERPRISE Enterprise associated with notification SCOMMUNITY SNMPv1 v2c community string STRANSPORT Notification s transport protocol SPORT UDP port of notification receiver SVBCOUNT Total number of variable bindings in notification SVB E og E bindings E can be individual bindings from the variable bindings list 1 3 19 ranges of bindings 3 6 or both 1 3 6 19 SVB_VALUE N Log the value part of the N th binding SVBALL og all bindings SSEC_USER_NAME SNMPv3 security user name SSEC_AUTH_PROTOCOL SNMPv3 authentication protocol SSEC_PRIV_PROTOCOL SNMPv3 privacy protocol SSEC_CONTEXT SNMPv3 context name c The following for each loop reserved words are available SFOR_EACH_BEGIN Starts the for each loop SFOR_EACH_END Ends the for each loop 73 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Action Object Properties Windows Every reserved word inside the for each loop i e between the SFOR_EACH_BEGIN and FOR_EACH_END reserved words is expanded repeatedly for each event that is merged and sent in a message d The following reserved words are available for a conditional notification block SIF_SNMP_NOTIFICATION_BEGIN Starts the SNMP notification block SIF_SNMP_NOTIFICATION_END Ends the SNMP notification block Any reserved word and regular text can be put into the conditional notification bloc
94. MG SOFT Corporation Net Inspector 2015 Client REFERENCE MANUAL Document Version 10 6 Document published on October 16 2015 Copyright 1995 2015 MG SOFT Corporation MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Introduction In order to improve the design or performance characteristics MG SOFT reserves the right to make changes in this document or in the software without notice No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical for any purpose without the express written permission of MG SOFT Corporation Permission to print one copy is hereby granted if your only means of access is electronic Depending on your license certain functions described in this document may not be available in the version of the software that you are currently using Screenshots used in this document may slightly differ from those on your display MG SOFT may have patents patent applications trademarks copyrights or other intellectual property rights covering subject matter in this document The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents trademarks copyrights or other intellectual property Copyright 1995 2015 MG SOFT Corporation All rights reserved C2 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Introduction TABLE OF CONTENTS El Le DT en EE 10 2 About Users Access Rights and User Views KEEN 11 3 Net Inspector Client Main Wind
95. N F238 Ed ds e et aS 83 General View n eege EENS Ee iii 83 SENES VIEW A A E n 85 Filters E 86 Statisties EE 86 BUON A E 86 Status DA A A e 87 7 System Object Properties WiINdOWS ooumccnmncccnnnccnnnacanananannnananr nana rrnnaacr nana 88 7 1 Event Properties Window mois 88 LO 4 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Introduction LAT PUDO tic tiie bavi oii A anise soni oni anh oe 88 SMO OPO NING EE 88 Fe Ee did 88 General ME 88 NA A ee ee ee EE 90 Kr 9 7 2 Configuration Properties WiNndOW ccconisnccono sic 91 Peh FUPI TE 91 LLL e ee GEET 91 Pea DESCI TT 91 Contra cate cies E DANA E E A E Edel 92 SAM e a a a a ia EE ESA aeae elt 93 Kr 94 7 3 SNMP Notification Properties Wimdow ocn nnnnnnnccnnnnnnnnos 95 AR D eet 95 Li 3 2 ODCNING A at nh aici ieee a ral allan Awe diate dine 95 7 3 3 D SCHDUON coi ii A oii inhale ih ana iin 95 GENET VIEW ssc srs Ba O e a SSNs ee ht MO AO thes 95 Settings VI iS 97 SEQUAS DOT A A O DE EE 97 7 4 Performance Manager Properties Window oooooooococcccccccoconononcccccnononnnonanncanonnrnnnnnnna 98 LIL SPUIDOS O EE oi 98 LGD O o GE 98 24 3 DOSIS ales beets Sie 98 ET EE 98 DUDA A ad aaa SS 100 8 Server Settings Dialog BOX sica 101 PUDO A ada 101 ODA A EENEG SEAN SE 101 DESCAPIN daa 101 8 1 User Views Padua AA A 101 8 1 1 New User view dialog box 102 Pop up MGI iee a a E A a E AE AR NEENA 103 8 1 2 Edit User View Dialog Box 103 Pop up MenM zeier
96. NMP Ping polling Poll every input line Specifies the interval for monitoring parameters that are collected through SNMP like information about the interfaces resources storages etc and the interval for monitoring network services non SNMP Resync Interval 2 input lines Specifies the interval in hours and minutes for automatic alarm resynchronization if both input lines contain O zero the automatic alarm resynchronization is disabled 4 109 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Server Settings Dialog Box Timeout input line Specifies the timeout value in seconds This value determines how long Net Inspector Server will wait for a response to each SNMP and ICMP Echo request it sends to the managed object before generating a timeout interrupt signal Retries input line Specifies the number of times the SNMP and ICMP Echo request will be retransmitted after the first timeout occurs Monitors frame ICMP checkbox If this checkbox is checked the ICMP ping polling is enabled Services checkbox If this checkbox is checked the monitoring of network services is enabled If monitoring of network services is enabled in Net Inspector WorkGroup and better editions each managed object is automatically scanned for the supported network services and detected services are automatically monitored In the LITE Edition of Net Inspector you need to manually configure which network services will be monitored
97. Net Inspector Reference Manual MIB Browser Window a Find Opens the Find dialog box that lets you search for a node by its name eg system or OID value e g 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 The Find operation searches the MIB tree for the specified input downward or upward from the selected node depending on whether you click the Next or the Previous button in the Find dialog box To find only the node whose name or OID fully matches the input in the Find input line check the Whole word only checkbox If this option is disabled all nodes that contain the specified string in the Name or in the OID value will be found a Expand Expands the hierarchical MIB tree structure below the selected node a Collapse Collapses the hierarchical MIB tree structure below the selected node a MIB Modules Opens the MIB Modules panel used for loading and unloading MIB modules o Properties Opens the MIB Node Properties dialog box which displays the SMI properties of the node selected in the MIB tree like the node name type OID syntax status description etc Displayed properties are extracted from the MIB module that defines the selected node Results Panel The Results panel occupies the right portion of the MIB Browser window below the toolbar It displays the returned values i e the name or OID syntax and value of every retrieved object instance or an error message e g a timeout Example Results displayed in the Results panel of the MIB Br
98. OK button Applies all changes and closes the dialog box Cancel button Discards all changes and closes the dialog box Pop up Menu To display the pop up menu select a user view in the User Views list and right click it This pop up menu contains the following commands a Assign Entitles selected users to access the given user view assigns the user view to users a Unassign Debars selected users from accessing the given user view unassigns the user view from users LA 104 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Server Settings Dialog Box 8 2 Users Panel Purpose The Users Panel is used for creating and managing user accounts for Net Inspector users Description The Users Panel provides a graphical user interface for managing Net Inspector user accounts i e creating editing and deleting user accounts and their properties usernames passwords access rights user groups descriptions Once you create a new user account you need to assign one or more user views to it in the User Views Panel This panel provides the following controls User Accounts List Displays the list of existing Net Inspector user accounts It contains the following columns User Displays the username of the user account Access Displays the user account access rights i e administrator operator or guest Group Displays the name of the user group the user account is a member of Description Disp
99. Ow css seeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 12 Sal Maps WindOW oa ssid Aled EE ee 12 JAM PUDO Oir iO O se a ea de eae 13 E OD STUNG EE 13 GTa DOSCOPUO tii cli ait ee ister doth Rolie eit el ious id er ithe vate lite ie daa 13 EE 13 Map Vi WS cias canti an tino 13 AO O 13 EE le EE 17 3 1 4 Maps Window Pop Up Mem 25 3 1 5 Device Performance TOOMIDS 1 2 ccccsccccescsenceceeeeecennsssneecsencecensesnaseseaeecsenseseasstseseessnnsesiaes 29 3 1 6 New Object Dialog BOX imc a dde 31 3 1 7 Connection Labels Dialog Dox 32 3 1 8 Find Objects Dialog E EE 34 Search Tab Pop Up Men id 34 3 1 9 Change Profile Dialog Box 35 3 1 10 Import from CSV File Dialog Box 35 K fe EAN Objets ET ii 37 3 1 12 Viewing Alarms for Selected Objects oooooocnocinnncicinnccnocccononnnnncncnncncnonrnn narran crac 37 32 EENHEETEN 38 IET PUPO iets eta a ins Leh ghee labia 38 8 2 2 ODENING EE 38 IL DOSC UON E 38 Explorer Window in Design Mode ENEE ENNEN 39 Object Status and Alarm Dropegoatiom EEN 39 3 28 POP Me A ias 40 3 3 Map Overview WINKOW casual ode 42 GES PUNO OS Cie gsc ti sais A A A A AA EIA 42 DEL TODO EE 42 DIO DOS CHOU E 42 3 4 Events WiNdOW ccccccccccoconcncncnnncnnnnncnononnnnnonononnnnnnnnnononannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnoneneninnenenennns 43 JAM RUIDOSO A ica teh ea alls Sata th ade 43 34 2 O SMING EE 43 IS DOSCHDUON A vii teh eich See a 43 Events Alarms and Active Alomme 43 Severity Levels Alam ac
100. P page on any web site select the External HTTP frame item LA 163 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Statistics drop down list Performance Manager Home Page Window Depending on the entry you have selected in the Statistics group drop down list a different set of options is available in the Statistics drop down list Select the desired statistics from this drop down list If you chose the General statistics group you have the following statistics available D Oooooocooo Alarms Top5 Top10 Top20 Device Status Devices with problems Device Map Response Time Current Response Time Current Packet Loss If you have selected the Default Statistics group you can further select among the following statistics a Device status response time and packet loss statistics Q a Response time Packet loss a Network interfaces traffic errors and status statistics ISS Seefe ee ee e e e e e e ef ef ee ee OU Interface input octets Interface output octets Interface input packets Interface output packets Interface input utilization Interface output utilization Interface input traffic Interface output traffic Interface input average packet size Interface output average packet size Interface input average packet rate Interface output average packet rate Interface admin status Interface operation status Interface input discards Interface output discards Interface input errors Interfac
101. Phi A ta AA 186 Select Discovery Strategy Step 3 sssscscscsssscssecccsscssssssesecssecscesscsecssesessesesesesesesecsescseceseescecscseneaeencecacsencaeeeeseeees 188 Review Settings and Start Discovery Step 2 190 17 Discovery Panel Dialog BOX occcccccccnnncncccoccccnoccnonnnnnnanoncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnrr rene 191 TA eeh 191 A EE 191 Ke le re Ms 191 17 3 1 Add Configure Discovery Preferences 0 1 cccccccseeccesnseceeeeeceeeeessesecneeceeeestsnaeeseneecennsesiaes 192 Advanced Discovery Settings Dialog Box ENEE ENNEN 196 17 4 Discovery Dialog BOX od coords dead 196 LAT POD SUD MONI ssl tes io o 197 18 Manage Discovery Filters Dialog BOX ooccccccccccononccccccnncnononnnnnnanacnnnnnnnnnnnnnnas 198 e MS 198 O pe emer ee ere ere ye a enn Terre ere mn eer ere 198 183 DESCHiDUON sus 198 18 3 1 New Edit Filter dialog box 198 19 Device Panel Dialog E nnmnnn nenna 202 TDS APU DOSE ia is eee 202 19 2 Openg eee aae e ie 202 EE ER tre e EE 202 KEE Tele RO RE 205 EEN EE 206 20 Ping and Traceroute Console Window cccccceseeseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 207 20 T PUPO SE ditched Sete AN 207 20 2 OPENING O 207 EE ee 207 21 MIB Browser MN uelEE eege 209 21A tee ET 209 A EE 209 21 3DOSCNPUON similar dto 209 22 Client Preferences Dialog BOX ccccsssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 215 22 tee ass pta 215 A A NA 215 22 3 Descriptif scenie Eet EES ee 215 General Ban diia 215 Graphics E 217 Sou
102. To open the Print dialog box use the File Print command 24 3 Description Depending on what is selected before you open it the Print dialog box lets you print the contents of the o Explorer window or a Maps window selected tab or a Events window selected tab or a Event Details sub window This dialog box lets you configure the printing options like printer setting page settings etc and send the output to the selected printer which is accessible from the computer that runs Net Inspector Client The Print dialog box provides the following controls Printer frame Name field Displays the name of the printer to which the print job will be sent This is the default printer on the system where Net Inspector Client runs To change the printer click the Print Settings button and select another printer from the dialog that appears Print Settings button Opens the system standard Print dialog box which lets you select among available printers set printer specific options configure the printing range and the number of copies etc Page frame Size field Displays the size of the paper or other print media To change it click the Page Setup button and select a different paper size from the dialog that appears Orientation field Displays the orientation portrait or landscape of the paper or other print media To change it click the Page Setup button and select a different orientation from the
103. User Views Panel Purpose The User Views panel is used for creating user views and for assigning user views to Net Inspector users Description A user view is a particular view of objects registered with the Net Inspector system User views differ in respect to what objects they display and how those objects are grouped and hierarchically structured A user view can display either all managed action and system objects registered with Net Inspector e g an administrator user view or any subgroup of those objects e g user views assigned to users with limited access rights An object can be displayed included in more than one user view A user view displays only those alarms which are associated with the objects included in that user view See also section About Users Access Rights and User Views Normally at least one user view is assigned to each Net Inspector user If only one user view is assigned to the user this user view is automatically activated and displayed when the user logs on to Net Inspector Server i e the Client main window displays only those objects that are included in the given user view If more than one 101 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Server Settings Dialog Box user view is assigned to the user the user can select the desired user view upon logging on to Net Inspector Server When a connection between Net Inspector Server and Client is established users can switch between the
104. a Service availability Q Availability of service If you have selected the External HTTP Frame option you can create a report page containing an existing HTTP page on any web site Depending on the selected statistics you need to configure some or all of the following settings 4 165 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Performance Manager Home Page Window Data value drop down list Here you choose the value data to be shown Average Raw Min or Max Object Label input line Specify the name label for the given custom report page object note that report pages can contain more than one object Time period drop down list Select the time period for which the data in the report will be included Sample interval drop down list Select the sample interval for which the data in the report will be included View type drop down list Here you can select the Data Table entry to present the data in form of a table the Graph if applicable to show values in a graph the Pie Graph if applicable to present the results in a pie graph or the Gauge Graph if applicable to render the results in a gauge graph Width in drop down list Select the desired width of the object as it will appear in the report page Graph scale drop down list This option appears only if you have selected the Graph option in the View type drop down list Choose between the linear or logarithmic scales for graphs Graph type dr
105. action object this means that the action functionality it represents e g sending e mails to particular recipients is enabled and its operation is being monitored by Net Inspector For a system object this means that the Net Inspector subsystem it represents e g event storage subsystem is enabled and its functioning is being monitored by Net Inspector This checkbox is always unchecked for maps Name Displays the name of the object Status Displays the current status of the object Alarms Displays the total number of active alarms on the object This field also reflects the color of the most severe active alarm that currently exists on the object according to the alarm severity colors configured in the User Preferences dialog box Colors panel New Alarms Displays the number of new alarms on the object New alarms are active alarms which are not acknowledged The New Alarms field also reflects the color of the most severe new alarm that currently exists on the object according to the alarm severity colors configured in the User Preferences dialog box Colors panel State Displays a graphic symbol circle whose color indicates the current operability state of the SNMP agent on the managed object this property is shown only for the managed objects The following operability states and colors are used 203 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Device Panel Dialog Box operability state color of the graphic
106. ain listed in the current view otherwise they automatically disappear from the current list of alarms when cleared a Keep Manually Cleared Alarms toggle menu option If this option is checked alarms that are manually cleared by the user remain listed in the current view otherwise they automatically disappear from the current list of alarms when cleared System View The System view contains the following controls Type input line Displays the type of the managed object e g IP Class input line Displays the class of the managed object which can be one of the following a Workstation Server Printer Switch Router Gateway Equipment Multiplexer Transport Database Firewall Transmitter Any OOOOOOODOOCDODODO Tags input line and Edit button Displays and lets you add a tag user description to the managed object Objects can be searched by the value of their tags To add or edit a tag click the Edit button and enter a new tag into the dialog box that appears Location input line The physical location of the managed object Net Inspector discovery operation sets this value to the value of the sysLocation 0 object instance returned by the SNMP agent Vendor input line The vendor of the managed object Net Inspector discovery operation sets this value to the name of the enterprise responsible for the OID returned by the sysObjectID 0 object instance The enterprise names displayed are taken from th
107. al information about the managed object By default this is the URL of the performance statistics page of the managed object Coordinate X The geographic coordinate X of the managed object Coordinate Y The geographic coordinate Y of the managed object Coordinate Z The geographic coordinate Z of the managed object Address The host name or the fully qualified domain name of the managed object If none of these exist it displays the IP address of the managed object IP address The IP address of the managed object Polling Profile The poling profile assigned to the managed object 16 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Net Inspector Client Main Window SNMP Access Profile The SNMP access profile assigned to the managed object Entity ID The entity ID of the managed object entity Entity Address The address of the managed object entity Entity SNMP Access Profile The name of the SNMP access profile used for directly accessing the managed object entity NetFlow Source Indicates whether the managed object is a NetFlow sFlow source or not New Device Indicates whether the managed object device is new or not New managed objects are those that have been added to the system by the Auto configuration and network discovery features 2 Graphics View Icons The Graphics view displays the contents of a map by means of icons that represent managed objects action objects system objects and submaps
108. alarm messages Each message is represented by one line Lines containing the built in messages have grey background color indicating that these messages cannot be edited Lines containing the user defined messages have white background color indicating that they can be edited The Messages list contains the following columns ID Displays the unique identification number ID of the message User defined messages have message ID in range 50000 90000 Message Displays the message text Cause Displays the probable cause associated with the message Event Type Displays the event type associated with the message Buttons Add button Adds a new line to the Messages list and puts the line in the edit mode so its attributes can be configured by entering the message ID and message text values into corresponding input lines ID Message and selecting the probable cause end event type values from the corresponding drop down lists Cause Event Type After you have finished configuring the message attributes click the Apply button to apply the changes and exit the edit mode Edit button Puts the selected user added line in the edit mode so its attributes can be configured by editing the message text in the Message input line and by selecting different probable cause end event type values from the corresponding drop down lists Cause Event Type After you have finished editing the message attributes click the Apply button to ap
109. alog box Name input line Lets you enter the filter name This is also the name of a tab in the Events window in which the filtered results will be displayed New condition toolbar Severity z lis k E critical z CONDITION OPERATOR VALUE TYPE This toolbar lets you create a filter condition by selecting the condition type operator and value from the corresponding drop down lists Once the condition is configured you can add it to the filter by clicking the Add button in the right section of the Create Filter dialog box Added conditions appear in the Conditions panel below the New condition toolbar 2 170 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Create Filter Dialog Box Condition type drop down list Specifies the type of the condition You can select among the following types of conditions RI Severity Specifies the severity level of the alarm If this condition type is selected you can choose the alarm severity level from the Value drop down list e g Critical Major etc Source Uniquely identifies the object which has triggered the alarm This condition type lets you search for objects by their object IDs note that different objects can have the same name however all objects have unique object IDs If this type of condition is selected click the Browse button next to the Value field to open the Select Source dialog box The Select Source dialog box displays two panels th
110. ame input line Lets you enter the name of the new type This input line is read only when creating sub types Class drop down list Lets you select the class of the managed object e g Switch Vendor input line Lets you enter the vendor of the managed object e g MG SOFT To cover all possible vendors leave this input line blank Icon drop down list Lets you select the icon of the new type Note To use custom icons copy the custom icon image files to the Engine icon folder on computer running Net Inspector Server The icons dimensions must be 32x32 pixels and they must be stored in PNG file format png OK button Applies all changes and closes the dialog box Cancel button Discards all changes and closes the dialog box LA 144 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Server Settings Dialog Box 8 9 Chart Panel Purpose The Chart Panel is used for creating opening and deleting charts Charts display lines that show how the values of variables retrieved from managed object s change in time Description Net Inspector lets you monitor the values of some important numerical variables e g CPU load memory usage storage usage interface utilization etc collected from one or more devices in charts Charts display lines that show how the values of selected variables change in time Charts are configured in the Chart Panel by the users with administrator access rights When a chart
111. an set the threshold values for triggering and clearing alarms associated with interfaces If Net Inspector Server is used for polling the collected information will be displayed in the Interfaces view of the managed object s Properties window If Performance Manager polling engine is polling the device the collected information will be displayed in the Interfaces frame in the Device Statistics window 4110 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Server Settings Dialog Box Interface status checkbox If this checkbox is checked Net Inspector monitors the status network interfaces on the given managed object and triggers alarm if any of the interfaces goes down without being administratively disabled The alarm is automatically cleared when the interface comes up again In utilization checkbox and two input lines If this checkbox is checked you can enter the interface inbound utilization threshold values in into the accompanying input lines This way Net Inspector will trigger an alarm when the interface inbound utilization rate exceeds the configured value for triggering the alarm first input line and clear the alarm when the same utilization rate falls below the clear alarm threshold value second input line Out utilization checkbox and two input lines If this checkbox is checked you can enter the interface outbound utilization threshold values in into the accompanying input lines This way Net Inspector wi
112. and probable event causes as well as add and edit user defined alarm messages event types and probable event causes Source Info input line Lets you specify the source info property for the resulting alarm The source info alarm property is used to provide more information about the alarm condition It can be configured to display one or more attributes of the received SNMP notification by entering the notification reserved words into this input line you can combine any text with reserved words The source info value is optional However if specified it serves as one of the conditions for clearing the alarm as described below Alarm Clearing Principle Whenever applicable one should create two trap to alarm rules for each type of alarm condition e g fault one that triggers the alarm and the other that clears it For example if a device sends an SNMP Trap when the chassis temperature raises above the normal level and another SNMP Trap when the temperature drops back to normal you should create two trap to alarm rules one that will raise the alarm set the alarm severity level to other than Cleared and the other to clear the alarm i e set its severity level to Cleared Alarm clearing is controlled by the severity message and source info values besides the trap filter More specifically a trap to alarm rule B which clears the alarm triggered by the trap to alarm rule A must have the same alarm message an
113. and run simultaneously in Net Inspector e g each discovery operation being performed on a different part of the network storing results to different configuration database and adding devices to different user views Adding objects to maps is a part of the procedure of creating and maintaining a user view for more information see the User Views Panel section La 191 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Discovery Panel Dialog Box Discovery Panel dialog box provides the following controls Discovery Operations List Displays the list of existing discovery operations It contains the following columns Discovery Displays the name of the discovery operation Status Displays the current status of the discovery operation e g Finished Scanning local subnet Type Displays the type of the search whether it is scanning the local subnet specified ranges or a SNMP agent Buttons Add Opens the Add Discovery Preferences dialog box which lets specify settings for a new discovery operation Remove Deletes the selected discovery operation Discovery results Opens the Discovery Dialog Box with the discovery results Configure Opens the Configure discovery dialog box which lets you view and edit the settings of the selected discovery operation Start Starts the selected discovery operation Stop Stop the selected running discovery operation 17 3 1 Add Configure Discovery Preferences Th
114. anual Server Settings Dialog Box New condition toolbar Severity vj lis k E critical e CONDITION OPERATOR VALUE TYPE This toolbar lets you create a filter condition by selecting the condition type operator and value from the corresponding drop down lists Once the condition is configured you can add it to the filter by clicking the Add button in the right section of the dialog box Added conditions appear in the Conditions panel below the New condition toolbar Condition type drop down list Specifies the type of the condition You can select among the following types of conditions RI Severity Specifies the severity level of the event If this condition type is selected you can choose the event severity level from the Value drop down list e g Critical Major etc Source Uniquely identifies the object which has triggered the event This condition type lets you search for objects by their object IDs note that different objects can have the same name however all objects have unique object IDs If this type of condition is selected click the Browse button next to the Value field to open the Select Source dialog box The Select Source dialog box displays two panels the left panel contains the expandable map tree while the panel on the right displays all objects included in the map that is selected in the left panel The left panel also displays some properties of the listed objects includi
115. ars from the Tools section of the Maps window pop up menu 22 3 1 Custom Action dialog box The Custom Action dialog box lets you create and edit a user defined command action that starts an external program on the PC that runs Net Inspector Client and optionally pass the relevant managed object details like the IP address etc as command line parameters to the given external program User defied commands are added to the Tools section of the pop up menu for managed objects in the Maps window To open the Custom Action dialog box click the Add button in the Tools panel of the Client Preferences dialog box or select an existing user defined command and click the Edit button in the same dialog box This dialog box contains the following controls Name input line Specifies the name of the user defined command as it will appear in the Tools section cascaded menu of the Maps window pop up menu 0 218 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Client Preferences Dialog Box Application input line with the Browse button Provides the full path to the application to be executed when this command is selected from the pop up menu Click the Browse button next to this input line to navigate to the desired application and select it from disk Capture output checkbox If this checkbox is checked a new tab opens in the Events window when the command is selected from the pop up menu This tab displays the command line that has invo
116. asking the passwords with bullet characters Enter key in hex notation directly radio button If this option is selected you can specify the authentication or privacy security key directly by entering it into the accompanying input lines in hexadecimal notation In this case the software does not employ the USM password to key algorithm Instead if the Do not localize authentication or privacy keys checkbox in the SNMPv3 Settings frame is not checked Net Inspector applies only the security key localization 118 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Server Settings Dialog Box algorithm to the entered security key and then uses the localized security key for communicating with the SNMPv3 agents If that checkbox is checked Net Inspector uses the security key exactly as it was entered Clear Key button Clears all input lines for specifying the security key OK button Applies all changes and closes the dialog box Cancel button Discards all changes and closes the dialog box 4119 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Server Settings Dialog Box 8 4 Action Filters Panel Purpose It is used for viewing and managing action filters Action filters can be applied to action objects to restrict their functionality so that only events that match the filter conditions will carry out the given action Description Users with administrator access rights can use Action Filters panel to create edit and r
117. at either for all managed devices or only for a subset of devices specified by a filter Results can be sorted by any column included in reports e g device name availability number of alarms discarded packets min and max values etc Predefined reports can be exported to PDF and CSV comma separated values file formats for external viewing or post processing The Time reports frame in the Reports page contains a list of predefined reports in different categories e g Interfaces Host resources Services etc Click the category name to view all time reports that belong to it The categories are a Status device availability response time and packet loss reports a Fault fault management reports number of alarms per severity alarm duration and frequency etc o Interfaces network interface related reports input output utilization traffic error rate etc a Host resources system resources usage reports CPU memory storage volumes a Processes monitored processes reports process running status CPU usage memory usage Q Services service availability service round trip time RTT o NetFlow user selectable NetFlow sFlow statistics TopN repots NetFlow categories applications receivers transmitters protocols NetFlow sources all specific network interfaces all specific a Cisco Cisco specific resources usage reports memory interfaces and Cisco IP SLA specific reports round trip tim
118. ated alarms You can also create and view reports and perform other actions available in the MG SOFT Performance Manager module For details please refer to the Net Inspector Performance Manager User Manual that installs with the software The Performance Manager Home Page window contains the toolbar web browser and status bar components as follows 11 3 1 Toolbar The toolbar is displayed directly below the title bar and contains the following buttons Back button This button lets you to go to the previously visited web page Forward button This button lets you browse to the next web page in the browse history Refresh button Re loads the current web page Print button Clicking this button opens the standard Print dialog box that lets you print the current web page LA 159 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Performance Manager Home Page Window 11 3 2 Web Browser This frame occupies the area between the toolbar and the status bar It displays the web pages generated by the Performance Manager polling engine s where you can monitor devices status and alarms Furthermore you can create and view reports By default the user s homepage displays the Welcome frame and a list of all devices in the system showing their status PM website has the following components Tabs The following tabs are displayed at the top of the website Home tab When you click this tab the user s homepage
119. ation c The following icons are used to represent different types of system objects Net Inspector subsystems SYS_CONFIG configuration object A SYS_SNMP_NOTIF SNMP notification object SYS_EVENT event object HA 18 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Net Inspector Client Main Window A SYS_PERF_MNG performance manager object The system objects represent different parts of Net Inspector system System objects can be placed onto maps and monitored in the same way as managed objects System objects trigger alarms when there are problems with the Net Inspector subsystems they represent Furthermore the status of system objects changes if any critical faults associated with the corresponding subsystems occur This principle lets you monitor the health of the network and the management system in the same manner d The following icon is used to represent a map submap Map submap e The cloud symbol is used to represent an unknown device e g hub unmanaged switch etc or a part of the network Cloud symbols are added to the workspace by the Net Inspector discovery module or manually by using the Graphics Toolbar Cloud unknown device or part of the network Status of Objects The background color of an object icon indicates the status of that object device action functionality Net Inspector subsystem The following table shows the
120. ation e g http www cisco com en US docs ios 12_4 ip_sla configuration guide hsoverv html RTT measurement status checkbox If this checkbox is checked Net Inspector monitors the round trip time measurement status for all enabled IP SLA services on the given managed objects and triggers an alarm if any enabled service is down The alarm is automatically cleared when the service is up again Echo round trip time checkbox and two input lines If this checkbox is checked the ICMP echo round trip time threshold is enabled Enter the echo round trip time threshold values in ms into the accompanying input lines This way Net Inspector will trigger an alarm when the echo round trip time exceeds the configured value for raising the alarm first input line and clear the alarm when the round trip time falls below the clear alarm threshold value second input line Path echo round trip time checkbox and two input lines If this checkbox is checked the full path echo round trip time threshold is enabled Enter the full path echo round trip time threshold values in ms into the accompanying input lines This way Net Inspector will trigger an alarm when the full path echo round trip time exceeds the configured value for raising the alarm first input line and clear the alarm when the round trip time falls below the clear alarm threshold value second input line 113 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Server Settings Dial
121. ation and vice versa Packet Loss SD DS and latency from source to destination and vice versa Latency SD DS By clicking an IP SLA operation in the first column eg VoIP RTTMON you can view more detailed statistics with history for the given IP SLA operation For VolP IP SLA this includes the MOS mean opinion score round trip time RTT jitter packet loss latency packet out of sequences packet MIA and packet late arrivals For more information about those parameters please consult the Cisco documentation that came with your equipment Custom Statistics The Custom Statistics frame in the device performance web page displays the list of custom user configured SNMP parameters and their values The Custom Statistics frame is not displayed by default To enable displaying it enable the Custom Statistics category in the Edit Page Layout drop down frame By clicking an item in the list you can view its detailed statistics in a dedicated web page This includes a table of retrieved values and a graph of retrieved numerical values of the user specified SNMP parameters Device Related Alarms The Alarms frame in the Performance Statistics window displays all active alarms that are associated with the given device If no active alarm for the given device exists the Alarms frame is not displayed The following information is displayed for each alarm Time Date and time when the alarm occurred Description Short description o
122. auge charts Memory and Processor Usage Statistics The Memory and Processor Info frame in the Performance Statistics window displays information only for Cisco devices and devices supporting the standard HOST RESOURCES MIB module like servers workstations etc provided that the host resources monitoring is enabled in the polling profile assigned to those devices This frame displays information about device resources and their utilization rates i e physical memory size and consumption the number of CPUs processes and users and the CPU usage The last retrieved values are presented in gauge charts while the history graphs are shown in the right section of the page Click on a graph to view a web page with history data in form of a graph and table for the corresponding metric Storage Usage Statistics The Storage Info frame in the Performance Statistics window displays the monitored storage volumes logical disks their names sizes and current usage used and free space The last retrieved values are presented in gauge charts Click a gauge chart to view a web page displaying the storage volume usage history in form of a graph and table 155 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Performance Statistics Window Services Statistics The Services frame in the Performance Statistics window displays the list of monitored services e g HTTP FTP DNS SMTP etc their current status name and port for every s
123. automatically disappear from the current list of alarms when cleared Settings View The Settings view contains the following controls Recipient number input line Displays and lets you enter the phone number of the SMS message recipient The phone number must include the international country code the area code or mobile network code without the leading zero and the actual mobile phone number Do not prefix the number with the international direct dial prefix which is 00 in most countries 011 in North America and sometimes substituted with the plus sign For example to send SMS messages to the mobile phone number 041 222 222 in Slovenia you should enter the following into the Recipient number input line 38641222222 where the 386 is the international country code for Slovenia 41 is the mobile network code and the 222222 is the mobile phone number La 78 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Action Object Properties Windows Message frame and input area Lets you specify the contents of the SMS messages You can specify the contents of the SMS message by combining regular text with reserved words which allow you to include desired details of events into SMS messages All reserved words start with the character The reserved words are replaced with the actual event attributes when the SMS message is sent e g the SEVERITY reserved word is replaced with the event severity leve
124. ble dynamic visualization of link traffic Interface status nodes are displayed for devices that support the standard SNMP MIDI Interfaces table v Interface nodes and for which the connection endpoint interfaces are known The interface node represents the current status of the network interface used for the connection The interface status can be either up 0 down disabled or not present 0 The interface status nodes are not shown if the corresponding SNMP agent or entire managed object is down Check this checkbox to enable displaying device performance tooltips in the current map in the Maps window Graphics view If this option is enabled the current device performance information interface CPU memory storage utilization whichever available v Enable tooltips and active alarms are displayed in a tooltip when you hover the mouse cursor over a managed object icon without clicking it Click the titlebar of the tooltip to pin the tooltip window to the desktop and move it to the desired position on the screen e g to monitor device performance parameters and alarms in it Check this checkbox to lock the position of existing graphic elements and text on the map while allowing adding repositioning and deleting managed objects action objects system objects submaps and links This option is useful for example if you want to reposition icons on the map and do not want to move also the background image or other graph
125. box that appears select a desired CSV text file from disk The CSV file should contain the following data about devices to be imported one line per device Device IP address device name polling profile SNMP profile PM polling engine Allowed data separator characters Import rules 1 Only one attribute for each device may be used which must be IPv4 or IPv6 address 2 If more than 5 attributes are present for each device only the first 5 will be used 35 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Net Inspector Client Main Window 3 All the missing attributes will be replaced with the default values The Import from CSV File dialog box lets you view and edit the list of managed objects devices contained in the selected CSV file and finally import new objects and add them to the currently active map in the Maps window The Import from CSV File dialog box contains the following controls Devices list Displays the list of devices to be imported For each device the following information is displayed is separate columns IP address The IPv4 or IPv6 address of the managed object device This attribute must be present Name The name of the managed object device If this attribute is absent the IP address attribute is used as the name Polling profile The name of the polling profile that will be used for polling the managed object device If this attribute is absent in the CSV file the default polling
126. ccessively queries all object instances within the given OID subtree to retrieve their values For example if you select the system MIB tree node OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 and click this button the software will query the MIB II system subtree and display returned values i e the name or OID syntax and value of every retrieved object instance or an error message e g a timeout Note if the MIB node you are looking for is not displayed in the MIB tree the MIB module that defines this object is not loaded in Net Inspector You can load and unload MIB modules in the MIB Modules panel Tools Server Settings MIB Modules Cancel button Cancels the query operation SNMP Settings toolbar The SNMP Settings toolbar is displayed in the upper section of the MIB Browser window directly below the Address drop down list It is used for specifying SNMP parameters for accessing the SNMP agent selected in the Address drop down list The toolbar contains the following controls SNMP settings drop down list Lets you specify SNMP settings for querying managed device via SNMP protocol This can be done by selecting one of the existing SNMP access profiles as available in the Manage Profiles dialog box SNMP tab from the drop down list or by selecting the Custom SNMP settings entry and specifying custom SNMP access parameters Users with administrator access rights are allowed to select among all existing SNMP profiles in this drop down list
127. ce you create a new object type or sub type you can add an object of this sub type to the Net Inspector workspace This panel is used also for changing the object type icons Note To use custom icons copy the custom icon image files to the Engine icon folder on computer running Net Inspector Server The icons dimensions must be 32x32 pixels and they must be stored in PNG file format png About sub types and new types Every object type has four properties which uniquely identify it name class vendor and icon Sub types A sub type is a variation of a base type meaning that it has the same type name as the base type e g IP but different vendor class and or icon property For example Net Inspector displays different icons for different classes router switch workstation printer etc of the IP object type These are actually sub types of the IP managed object type as follows Type name Class Vendor Icon IP Router blank any X IP Switch blank any Y IP Printer blank any Z 141 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Server Settings Dialog Box Furthermore we can define different sub types within a class e g different icons for different vendors of IP routers Type name Class Vendor Icon IP Router Cisco x1 IP Router Juniper X2 IP Router Iskratel X3 In cases where two or more sub type definitions apply a more specific definition takes precedence over less specific definition s Exampl
128. chart tab in the Maps window and select the Properties command from the pop up menu that appears The chart properties dialog box provides the following controls Name input line Displays the name of the chart Units drop down list Displays and lets you select the units for chart values e absolute values percent values bytes bytes per second bits per second Selected units are displayed along the vertical axis of the chart Add button Opens the Add Chart Variable dialog box which lets add additional variables to the chart in two steps This dialog box has the same appearance and is used in the same way as the New Chart dialog box Remove button Removes selected variable from the chart Sources list Displays the source objects and variables that are monitored on each source OK button Closes the dialog box and applies the changes Cancel button Closes the dialog box and discards the changes LA 147 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Server Settings Dialog Box 8 10 MIB Modules Panel Purpose The MIB Modules panel lists all MIB modules registered with Net Inspector and lets you load and unload them Description The MIB Modules panel contains two lists the Loaded Modules list on the left side of the panel displays the names of currently loaded MIB modules while the Available Modules list on the right side lists the names of MIB modules which are currently not loaded In o
129. ciated with particular objects or only for events of a particular severity level etc Action filters are configured in the Manage Action Filters dialog box and applied to mail object in the Filters view of the Mail Properties window The Mail Properties window contains several views displaying different categories of parameters e g General Settings Message Users can switch between the views by selecting the corresponding entries from the category drop down list displayed in upper section of the Mail Properties window General View The General view contains the following controls Name input line Displays the name of the action object Type input line Displays the type of the action object Description input line Displays a short description of the action object Active alarms frame Displays a summary and a list of active alarms associated with the object Summary displays the total number of active alarms and the number of active alarms broken down by severity levels The list of alarms is displayed in the same manner as in the Events window LO 68 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Action Object Properties Windows The Mail action object triggers the following events and alarms MessagelD Severity Message 10004 Critical Invalid address or DNS error 10040 Critical Invalid filter 10041 Critical Extension process is not running 10044 Major Sending messages is temporarily disabled due to fu
130. ciated with the object Summary displays the total number of active alarms and the number of active alarms broken down by severity levels The list of alarms is displayed in the same manner as in the Events window The SMS action object triggers the following events and alarms MessagelD Severity Message 10040 Critical Invalid filter 10041 Critical Extension process is not running 10042 Critical Invalid settings 10043 Critical Modem timeout 10044 Major Sending messages is temporarily disabled due to full buffer 14001 Critical Failed to send message All alarms listed above change the status of the SMS object the status will match the alarm severity level Pop Up Menu To display the pop menu right click one or more alarms in the list of active alarms The pop up menu contains the following commands a Details Opens the Event Details window which displays details of the selected alarm This window display the same information as the Event Details sub window a Add Comment Opens the Add Comment dialog box that lets you enter or edit comment for the selected alarms Comments are displayed in the Comment column a Akcnowledge Acknowledges the selected alarms By acknowledging alarms users declare that they are aware of the alarms Acknowledged alarms are not shown in the alarm balloons a Unacknowledge Unacknowledges the selected alarms reverses the Acknowledge operation La 77 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manua
131. cond input line 0 114 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Server Settings Dialog Box Jitter round trip time checkbox and two input lines If this checkbox is checked the IP SLA VoIP Jitter round trip time threshold is enabled Enter the Jitter round trip time threshold values in ms into the accompanying input lines This way Net Inspector will trigger an alarm when the Jitter round trip time exceeds the configured value for raising the alarm first input line and clear the alarm when the round trip time falls below the clear alarm threshold value second input line Cisco Jitter SD checkbox and two input lines If this checkbox is checked the VoIP source to destination jitter threshold is enabled Enter the source to destination jitter threshold values in ms into the accompanying input lines This way Net Inspector will trigger an alarm when the source to destination jitter as measured by the IP SLAs exceeds the configured value for raising the alarm first input line and clear the alarm when the source to destination jitter falls below the clear alarm threshold value second input line Cisco Jitter DS checkbox and two input lines If this checkbox is checked the VoIP destination to source jitter threshold is enabled Enter the destination to source jitter threshold values in ms into the accompanying input lines This way Net Inspector will trigger an alarm when the destination to source jitter as meas
132. configurable more detailed statistics for the selected item eg device interface conversation application etc is shown Note To enable NetFlow or sFlow monitoring the source device s must be first configured using a vendor specific method to send NetFlow or sFlow packets to Net Inspector polling engine and the source devices must be set as NetFlow source in Net Inspector IP SLA page Here you can monitor various Cisco IP SLA operations By clicking an item in the first column RTTMON you can view more detailed statistics with history for the given IP SLA operation Report page Here you can view the predefined time reports configure custom report pages and export predefined and custom report pages to PDF and CSV format The Report page contains 3 frames Custom Pages Net Inspector Performance Manager lets you configure custom report pages containing graphs or tables displaying metrics monitored on one or more devices Examples of such custom reports are Top10 reports reports of monitored objects with problems etc Time Reports The Time Reports frame contains a list of predefined fault and performance management reports e g device availability number of alarms per severity network interface utilization that are accessible out of the box LA 162 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Performance Manager Home Page Window Exports This frame contains all Custom pages and Time reports that hav
133. controls Polling engines list Displays a list of existing Performance Manager polling engines including their IP address their status and the number of managed objects assigned to each polling engine Add button Opens the New Polling Engine dialog box which lets you add a new polling engine to the list The added polling engine must first be installed on the remote computer After adding a new polling engine to the system you can assign it to one or more managed objects by selecting the objects in the Maps window and choosing the Tools Change Performance Manager Polling Engine pop up command Edit button Opens the Edit Polling Engine dialog box in which you can edit the settings of the selected polling engine Remove button With this button you can remove existing polling engines After you have clicked the Remove button a confirmation window appears and asks you if you really want to remove the selected polling engine New Edit Polling Engine dialog box The New Polling Engine and Edit Polling Engine dialog boxes have the same appearance and provide the following controls IP Address input line The IP address of the computer running the polling engine you want to add edit Name input line The name label of the polling engine NetFlow Ports frame Lets you add edit and remove NetFlow sFlow reception ports La 126 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Server Settings Dialog Box Ports list
134. cted map and its submaps This command is available only when a sub map or an active user view icon is selected in the Explorer window El 40 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Net Inspector Client Main Window a Rename Lets you rename the selected map or user view After renaming the map or user view press the Enter key to apply the changes This command is available only when a sub map or an active user view icon is selected in the Explorer window a Users Opens the Edit User View dialog box that lists all users in the system and lets you assign the user view to users This command is available only when a user view icon is selected in the Explorer window a Expand Expands the hierarchical map structure below the selected sub map or active user view a Collapse Collapses the hierarchical map structure below the selected sub map or active user view a Cut Ctrl X Removes the selected map and its submaps if any and puts it on the clipboard This command is available only when a sub map icon is selected in the Explorer window a Copy Ctrl C Copies the selected map and its submaps if any to the clipboard This command is available only when a sub map icon is selected in the Explorer window o Paste Ctrl V Inserts the clipboard contents onto the selected map This command is available only when a sub map icon is selected in the Explorer window a Delete Del Deletes the selected map and its submaps if a
135. ctor Client Main Window 3 1 1 Purpose The Maps window is used for viewing the status and basic information about active alarms associated with the objects and submaps as well as for moving arranging and deleting icons representing objects and submaps and for manipulating graphic elements on the maps Besides the Maps window is used also for viewing charts 3 1 2 Opening Maps window is always open provided that connection between Net Inspector Client and Server is established 3 1 3 Description Tabs The Maps window contains one or more tabs When the user opens a user view for the first time only one tab is displayed in the Maps window This tab carries the name of the currently active user view and displays the contents of the root map of the given user view To create a new tab in the Maps window select a map in the Explorer window or a submap icon in the Maps window and choose the Open pop up command or double click the submap icon This will create a new tab in the Maps window and display the contents of the selected submap in it The newly created tab will carry the name of the map whose contents it displays Only one tab can be created for each map Besides new tabs can be created also by opening charts To remove an existing tab from the Maps window right click its tab symbol at the top of the Maps window and select the Close pop up command To close all tabs right click any tab symbol at the top of the Maps
136. d exit the edit mode Edit button Lets you modify the selected user defined cause text After editing the cause text click the Apply button to apply the change and exit the edit mode This button is disabled if a built in cause is selected Remove button Deletes the selected line cause Apply button Applies the changes in the edited line and exits the edit mode Cancel button Discards all changes in the edited line and exits the edit mode LA 139 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Server Settings Dialog Box 8 7 3 Event Type Tab This tab lets you view the list of the built in event types and their ID values as well as add edit and remove user defined event types and corresponding IDs The Event type tab provides the following controls Event Type List Displays the existing event alarm types Each event type is represented by one line Lines containing the built in event type values have grey background color indicating that they cannot be edited Lines containing the user defined event types have white background color indicating that they can be edited The Event Type list contains the following columns ID Displays the unique identification number ID of the event type User defined event types have the ID value in range 10000 20000 Event Type Displays the event type text Buttons Add button Adds a new line to the Event Type list and puts the line in the edit mode so it can
137. d source info value as the rule A and the severity set to Cleared Of course rule B will have a different trap filter than rule A Example of two trap to alarm mapping rules second screen used for triggering and clearing the PSU OFF alarm Edit Trap to Alarm Rule Raise PSU OFF alarm Critical This rule triggers opens the Severity Critical user defined PSU OFF alarm Message PSU OFF Source Info mcunitSupplyOffTrap LA 136 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Server Settings Dialog Box F Edit Trap to Alarm Rule Clear PSU OFF alarm _ This rule clears closes the Severity Q Cleared user defined PSU OFF alarm Message PSU OFF Source Info mcunitSupplyOfFTrap Note that when using reserved words e g VB_VALUE 4 for the source info value the reserved words are expanded replaced with the actual values from a received SNMP notification and then the expanded source info value is compared to source info values of open alarms when clearing alarms Buttons a Previous button Returns to the first screen while preserving the second screen configuration a Finish button Applies the changes and closes the dialog box If you have configured a new rule it is added to the Rules list in the Trap To Alarm Rules panel After clicking this button Net Inspector maps all newly received SNMP not
138. d for the NetFlow data The values for the last 7 days are kept unmodified in the database raw data without aggregation For the period between the last 32 days and last 7 days only the hourly averages are kept in the database For the period between the last 366 days and last 32 days only the daily averages are kept in the database The graph bars and table values in device performance web pages always display the average values of readings within sample intervals for example if the polling interval is 1 minute and the sampling interval is 5 minutes then each graph bar and table value will show the average value of 5 readings approximately By setting the sampling interval to equal to or less than polling interval for any period within the last 7 days for which the raw data is kept by default one can view the actual raw data individual readings collected from devices In addition to average values the absolute maximum MAX and minimum MIN values are shown in graphs and tables for each sampling interval Scale drop down list Lets you set the scale for the graphs on this page as follows a a Linear Logarithmic LA 154 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Performance Statistics Window Statistics drop down list Lets you select the statistics line s to be shown in graphs as follows a None a 95 percentile a Trend line or a Both Note 95 percentile and trend lines A percentile i
139. d user view and Device Panel dialog box e selected configuration as follows Configuration drop down list Lets you select the configuration which the discovered devices will be stored in User view drop down list Lets you select the user view which the discovered devices will be added to Submap drop down list Lets you select or enter the name of the target submap i e submap which the discovered devices and their interconnections will be added to If the specified submap does not exist yet it will be created Preserve connections checkbox Check this checkbox if you want the Net Inspector to preserve manually added connections between managed objects when adding discovered managed objects and their interconnections to the submap This option is relevant only if the target submap already contains some managed objects and connections between them Connection labels drop down list Lets you select what information will be displayed in connection labels i e labels on the ends of lines connecting managed objects You can choose to display the IP address or the name or the IP address and name of the endpoint network interface One can hide the connection labels later by clicking the Connection labels checkbox in the Graphics toolbar Display tunnel connections checkbox Check this checkbox if you want Net Inspector to display also the discovered tunnel connections between managed objects Discovery filter drop dow
140. d will increase and vice versa OK button Applies all changes and closes the dialog box Cancel button Discards all changes and closes the dialog box 17 4 Discovery Dialog Box The Discovery dialog box displays discovered devices grouped into subnet maps When the discovery operation finishes you can add either all discovered devices including the subnet maps particular groups of devices maps or individual devices to the workspace and to the Device Panel dialog box by using the corresponding pop up commands To open this dialog box select an existing discovery operation in the Discovery Panel dialog box and click the Discovery results button This dialog box provides the following controls Discovery results list Displays results of the discovery operation e discovered subnets network devices and their interfaces The list contains the following columns Name Displays the hostname of the discovered device or the IP address of the discovered subnet e g 212 33 224 0 for the subnet 212 33 224 0 212 33 224 255 Address Displays the IP address of the device s network interface If a device has two or more interfaces the IP address for each interface is listed LA 196 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Discovery Panel Dialog Box MAC Displays the MAC Media Access Control address of the device s network interface Info Displays the information about the device s network interface
141. ded into SNMPv2c and or SNMPYv3 notification messages a Variable Binding Lets you configure a filter condition that will let through only SNMP notifications containing a particular variable binding To add a variable binding filter condition select the Variable Binding condition type from the New condition drop down list The variable binding configuration preview and the Edit button are displayed in the New condition toolbar Variable Binding is y Binding 1 OID is sysLocation 0 Edit You need to configure a variable binding condition before adding it to the filter Note A variable binding has the following properties OlD name syntax value and position in the variable bindings list For example sysUpTime 0 Timeticks 2344223 Binding 1 These settings can be configured in the Binding Editor dialog box To configure a variable binding click the Edit button in the New Conditions toolbar The Binding Editor dialog box opens providing the following controls F Binding Editor x Variable Binding Oidi is w 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 6 0 OID Name sysLocation Syntax Octets v Value contains MG 5OFT om Position 4 E Any OID operator input line and button From the operator drop down list select the desired operator e g is is not or contains and enter the OID of the name portion of the variable binding into t
142. default object status colors object statuses and their meanings statuses are ordered from least to most critical Default Icon Background Color blue light blue Object Status unmanaged indeterminate Meaning M managed object A action object S system object M Device is not being managed polling is disabled A Action operation e g e mail sending is disabled S Net Inspector subsystem e g configuration module 3 is disabled M Device is being managed polling is enabled but information about device reachability is currently unavailable e g immediately after enabling polling or after losing connection with the polling engine A Not applicable S Not applicable LO 19 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Net Inspector Client Main Window M Device is being managed polling is enabled and it is responding to Net Inspector queries E A Action operation e g e mail sending is P normal enabled and it functions normally no critical faults exist green S Net Inspector subsystem e g event storage subsystem is enabled and performs its function successfully no critical faults exist major SNMP queries M Device is being managed polling is enabled Aa but it is not responding to Net Inspector Not applicable orange gt Not applicable M Device is being managed polling is enabled but it is not respondi
143. ding on the entry you have selected in the TopN group drop down list a different set of options is available in the TopN statistics drop down list Select the desired statistics from this drop down list If you selected Cisco statistics you have the following options a Jitter destination to source Jitter source to destination Mean opinion score Packet loss destination to source Packet loss source to destination Round trip time Oooco If you chose Host resources statistics you can select o CPU Load a Memory used a Storage usage If you have selected Network interfaces traffic errors and status statistics you can choose between a Interface input traffic Interface input utilization Interface output traffic Interface output utilization DOD Map image filename drop down list Here you can select an image file for a map report Upload map image input line If you want to upload an image the path to it must be entered here You can enter it manually or find it with the open file dialog by clicking the Browse button LA 167 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Performance Manager Home Page Window Browse button If you click this button the standard Open dialog box appears where you can choose an image you want to upload Upload button When you click this button the image you have written the path to or have selected in the open file dialog will be uploaded Add button When you are
144. dity 129 Low Cable Pressure 130 Low Temperature 131 Low Water 132 Smoke 133 Toxic Gas 134 Cooling System Failure 135 External Equipment Failure 136 External Point Failure 151 Storage Capacity Problem 152 Memory Mismatch 153 Corrupt Data 243 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Appendix 2 Cause List 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 500 503 504 505 510 512 514 515 521 522 523 524 528 531 532 534 536 537 541 542 543 545 546 549 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 Out Of CPU Cycles Software Environment Problem Software Download Failure Loss Of Real Time Application Subsystem Failure Configuration Or Customization Error Database Inconsistency File Error Out Of Memory Software Error Timeout Expired Underlying Resource Unavailable Version Mismatch Bandwidth Reduced Congestion Excessive Error Rate Excessive Response Time Excessive Retransmission Rate Reduced Logging Capability System Resources Overload Adapter Error Call Establishment Error Communications Protocol Error Communications Subsystem Failure Data Set Or Modem Error Dte Dce Interface Error Equipment Malfunction Excessive Vibration I O Device Error Input Device Error Lan Error Leak Detected Material Supply Exhausted Output Device Error Performance Degraded Pressure Unacceptable Pump Failure Queue Size Exceeded Resource At Or Nearin
145. done choosing what you would like to have in the report click this button to add it Custom report finalization Here you can see all the objects you want in the report You can delete the objects you don t want add new ones edit existing ones move them up or down with these controls Delete object 1 button This button enables you to delete existing objects Edit object button This button enables you to edit existing objects Delete row lt button This button lets you delete a whole row more than one object can be in one row Move down A button Moves the row down Move up button Moves the row up View button When you click this button you go to the report page where you see the report you have created edited Exports This frame contains all Custom pages and Time reports that have been exported by users to PDF format Remove button Removes the existing PDF report from the frame Time Reports Frame The Time Reports frame contains a list of predefined fault and performance management reports e g device availability number of alarms per severity network interface utilization that are accessible out of the box The user can select the desired time interval e g day week month quarter year for any of the LO 168 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Performance Manager Home Page Window predefined reports and the results are displayed in a tabular form
146. dow To view the entire structure of maps and submaps select the active user view icon in the Explorer window and choose the Expand pop up command Example of the Explorer window contents jA Explorer Net Inspector Server name 7 E User iew A A active user view 7 Bel Subnet 1 Dal Building 1 E 1st Floor Ma Basement i Building 2 B System 1 hierarchical map structure within the user view i inactive user views 66d LO 38 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Net Inspector Client Main Window Explorer Window in Design Mode Net Inspector Client offers two modes of operation normal and design mode In normal mode only one user view can be active open at a time In design mode on the other hand users can have more than one user view open at the same time and copy objects between active user views In design mode you can open any inactive user view by selecting its icon in the Explorer window and choosing the Open pop up command This will activate the selected user view without deactivating other active user views For more information about the design mode please see the Net Inspector Client Design Mode section Object Status and Alarm Propagation The colors of map icons in the Explorer window dynamically change to indicate the current status of objects and alarms on objects within those maps and their submaps By default the most critical object status and active alarm is propaga
147. down list are static i e always displayed while others are dynamic i e they are displayed only if the managed object provides information from the respective category If polling is performed by a Performance Manager polling engine e g when using MG SOFT Net Inspector WorkGroup Enterprise or Carrier Edition more comprehensive interface device performance and services statistics are displayed also in the Performance Statistics window The following entries and views in the Properties window are static a General object name address description polling engine list of active alarms etc a System object type class location vendor OS etc Q Settings assigned polling and SNMP profiles resynchronization configuration Q Services monitored TCP and UDP services present in LITE Edition only LU 55 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Properties Window If the managed object supports SNMP protocol the following dynamic entries may appear in the category drop down list of the Properties window depending on the MIB modules supported by the SNMP agent on the given device and the polling profile assigned to the corresponding managed object a Interfaces information about system network interfaces a Resources information about the system resources a Storage information about the system storage units General View The General view contains the following controls Name input line Displays
148. e Type name Class Vendor Icon IP blank any blank any IP Router blank any M IP Router MG SOFT N In the example above three IP sub types of different scopes are defined Line 1 defines the least specific IP sub type that covers objects of the broader scope any class and any vendor If lines 2 and 3 did not exist the line 1 would cover all classes and vendors of the IP object type In such case Net Inspector would display the icon O for all IP objects regardless of their class and vendor properties However as the lines 2 and 3 which are more specific do exist they take precedence over the line 1 in cases where the IP object type is of class Router and vendor is MG SOFT For example if we add a new object to the workspace whose type is IP class is Router and vendor is other than MG SOFT then Net Inspector will display the icon M for this object the sub type defined in the second line applies On the other hand if we create a new object of type IP class Router and vendor MG SOFT then Net Inspector will display the icon N for this object sub type from the third line New Types A new type also named a derived type is an object type that is based on one of the built in types e g IP but has its own unique name e g NEWIP New types inherit all the properties of the base types they are derived from As the built in types new types can also b
149. e Lets you enter edit the user group the given user account belongs to Access radio buttons Lets you select the access rights for the given user administrator operator guest Description input line Lets you enter edit the user account description OK button Applies all changes and closes the dialog box Cancel button Discards all changes and closes the dialog box 8 2 3 Change Password Dialog Box This dialog box is used for changing the user account password To open this dialog box select an item in the list of user accounts in the Users panel of the Server Settings dialog box and click the Change Password button Only users with administrator access rights are able to do this Alternatively to change your own password open this dialog box by selecting the Tools Change Password command Any user can do this The Change Password dialog box provides the following controls Username input line Displays the name for the user account Encryption drop down list Displays the current password encryption method and lets you change it i e MD5 or None e plain text Old password input line Lets you enter the old password This input line is shown only to users with operator and guest access rights when changing their own passwords Users with administrator amp 107 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Server Settings Dialog Box access rights can change the password of any user account
150. e between 1 and 2 merge intervals UI MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Action Object Properties Windows Message View The Message view contains the following controls Message frame Subject input line Lets you specify the contents of the e mail subject section by combining arbitrary text with reserved words which let you include desired information about events into the e mail subject All reserved words start with the character The reserved words are replaced with the actual event attributes when the e mail is sent e g the SEVERITY reserved word is replaced with the severity level of the event e g Critical To view all available reserved words click the Browse button next to the Subject input line to open the Reserved Words dialog box listing available reserved words and their descriptions To add a reserved word to the Subject input line select it in the Reserved Words list and click the Insert button You can also combine regular text with reserved words e g Event severity level SEVERITY Body input area Lets you specify the contents of the e mail message body section You can specify the contents of the e mail body section by combining arbitrary text with reserved words which let you include desired information about events into the e mail body To view all available reserved words click the Insert button at the bottom of the Mail Properties dialog box to ope
151. e conditions for finding alarms events triggered by the selected source objects Source name Specifies the name of the object as displayed on the workspace which has triggered the alarm or event If this condition type is selected you can enter the name of the object into the Value input line Note however that two or more objects can have the same name Use the Source condition type to uniquely specify the source in such case Source info Specifies additional information about the problem as displayed in the Source Info column in the Events window If this condition type is selected you can enter additional information about the object into the Value input line e g Processor H1 Source type Specifies the type of the object which has triggered the alarm or event If this condition type is selected you can choose the type of the object from the Value drop down list e g IP etc La 177 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Find Events Dialog Box a Message A short description of the alarm or event If this condition type and the operator is or is not is selected you can choose a message from the list of all messages in the Value drop down list e g Device is down If this condition type and the operator contains is selected you can enter a character string e g Dev into the Value input line to find all alarms whose message field contains the specified character s
152. e file format The Export Submap dialog box closely resembles the operating system s standard Save As dialog box Note that only information in columns that are currently displayed in the given tab of the Maps window will be exported This command is available only in the Details view a Save as Default Layout Users with administrator access rights are authorized to use this command to save the current layout of the Maps window Details view as a default layout Default layout stores the information about the display status displayed hidden order and width of the columns displayed in the currently active tab of the Maps window Details view Once the default layout is defined saved it automatically applies to all maps tabs you open in the Maps window Details view The default layout is also automatically applied to all users when they connect to Net Inspector Server for the first time until they modify their layout Therefore this command is typically LO 28 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Net Inspector Client Main Window used by administrators when configuring the system i e when defining default layouts of Net Inspector Client main windows etc This command is available only in the Details view a Load Default Layout Loads and applies the default layout in the current tab of the Maps window Details view Default layout stores the information about the display status displayed hidden order and width of t
153. e in case of a threshold event alarm it explains what threshold has been crossed e g Physical memory Source Type Displays the type of the object which has triggered the alarm event e g IP Message Displays a short description of the alarm or event e g Missing ATM connection data on remote CBx Cause Displays the cause of the alarm or event e g Line Card Problem Ack Date Time Displays the date and time of acknowledging or unacknowledging the alarm whichever was last Ack Cleared Info Displays the username and IP address of the user who has acknowledged or cleared the alarm whichever was last Cleared Date Time Displays the date and time of manually clearing or unclearing the alarm whichever was last Event Type Displays the type of the event alarm e g Quality Of Service Communication itd Message ID Displays the event alarm message identifier number e g 10002 Note 1 To sort alarms or events displayed in the Events window by a column click the relevant column heading Note 2 To change the position of a column in the Events window click the column heading and drag it to the desired position left or right from its current position Note 3 To enable or disable coloring rows with the colors assigned to alarm severity levels check or uncheck the Use Colors option in the Events window column selector ES Note 4 To view the details about the alarms or events
154. e in previous versions of Net Inspector a Find Starts the search operation and closes the Find Events dialog box Search results are displayed in a separate tab in the Events window The search progress bar at the bottom of this tab moves from left to right and vice versa until the search operation is finished To abort the search operation click the button in the Events window Note To modify the search conditions after the search operation has been started select the tab in the Events window where the results of this search operation are displayed and use the Events Modify Filter command The Find Events dialog box will reappear listing all the conditions that were used in the initial orevious search operation After modifying the search conditions click the Find button again The old research results will be deleted and new search results will be displayed in the same tab of the Events window a Cancel Discards all changes and closes the Find Events dialog box without starting the search operation 181 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Manage Event Attributes Dialog Box 14 MANAGE EVENT ATTRIBUTES DIALOG BOX 14 1 Purpose This dialog box is used for viewing and managing certain event alarm attributes i e event message probable cause and event type attributes 14 2 Opening To open the Manage Event Attributes dialog box click the Manage Messages bution in the New Edit Trap To Alarm dialog bo
155. e Alarms tab in the Events window a Modify Filter This command is used for modifying e g refining the conditions of an existing filter i e either a display filter or a search filter This command is available only if a find or filter tab is selected in the Events window It opens the Find Events dialog box or the Create Filter dialog box depending on which dialog box has been used initially and lets you modify the existing filter o Save Filter Lets you save the search or display filter that is applied in the currently selected tab of the Events window for later use The filter will be saved to the My filters repository which is stored on the Net Inspector Server computer This way the same user can later load the filter This command is available only if a filter of find tab is selected in the Events window o Save Filters Layout Lets you save all currently displayed display and action filter tabs in the Events window This command ensures that the existing display and action filter tabs are automatically restored next time the user opens the same user view This command is available only if a filter of find tab is selected in the Events window El 48 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Net Inspector Client Main Window o Export Opens the Export Events dialog box which lets you export alarms or events displayed in the currently active tab of the Events window to a HTML or CSV comma separated value file format The
156. e Discovery Preferences dialog box lets you view and edit the settings for the selected discovery operation To open this dialog box select the discovery you wish to edit and click the Configure button in the Discovery Panel This dialog box provides the following controls Name input line Lets you view and edit the name of the discovery operation 192 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Discovery Panel Dialog Box Schedule frame Run discovery every day at Xh Y min checkbox and two input lines If this checkbox is checked the discovery operation is run periodically every day at the same time specified in the hour and minutes input lines If this option is enabled in combination with the Automatically add discovered devices option Net Inspector will run the discovery operation on a daily basis and each time it will also automatically add the newly discovered devices to the selected user view and start monitoring them Results frame The settings in this frame control where the discovery results will be saved i e to which configuration file and user view Create submaps for subnets checkbox If this checkbox is checked Net Inspector automatically creates and puts the discovered devices into subnet maps when devices are added to the workspace Automatically add discovered devices to checkbox If this option is enabled Net Inspector automatically adds newly discovered devices to the workspace i e selecte
157. e action object a The current status of the action object UI 75 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Action Object Properties Windows 6 2 SMS Properties Window 6 2 1 Purpose The SMS Properties window is used for viewing and configuring parameters of the given SMS action object These parameters are used by Net Inspector Server to send SMS Short Message Service text messages through a modem in order to notify users about Net Inspector events Such a modem device must be connected to a serial port of the PC running Net Inspector Server The SMS Properties window also displays alarms triggered by the given SMS object 6 2 2 Opening The SMS Properties window can be opened by double clicking the SMS object icon in the Maps window or by right clicking the SMS object and selecting the Properties pop up command 6 2 3 Description An SMS object represents a particular Net Inspector SMS sending mechanism i e a mechanism that sends SMS messages containing event information to the specified phone numbers through a specific GSM or regular modem connected to a serial port of the PC running Net Inspector Server SMS messages are relayed to the recipients by the corresponding telecommunications services provider The SMS object itself triggers events and alarms if communication with the modem is unsuccessful or if the SMS sending operation fails for some other reason In addition the status of the SMS object changes
158. e been exported to PDF format Custom Pages Frame This frame displays a list of user configured custom page reports and the following buttons Remove button Removes the existing report page Edit button Lets you edit the existing report editing is virtually the same as adding Add New button Click on this button at the bottom of the frame to add a new custom report page Add Edit custom report page Report page name Set custom page title input line After clicking the Add New button enter the name of the new report on this input line OK button When you have written the name of your new report click the OK button Custom report page data Statistics group drop down list a General Select the General entry to be able to select one of the built in report types for more than one object Top 5 alarms lists device status list devices with problems list in the next step a Default Statistics Select the Default statistics item to be able to choose from one of the built in report pages for one or more devices in the next drop down list here reports for all parameters collected through SNMP and ICMP ping can be selected like the interface related statistics host resources related statistics Cisco related statistics etc a Custom Statistics To create a report page for custom made statistics select the Custom statistics entry a External HTTP frame To create a report page containing an existing HTT
159. e corresponding sections of this document 240 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Appendix 1 Event Type List APPENDIX 1 EVENT TYPE LIST In accordance with the ITU X 733 recommendation Net Inspector reports the following types of events and alarms Event Type ID Event Type Indeterminate Other Communication Quality Of Service Processing Error Equipment Enviromental Integrity Violation Operational Violation Physical Violation Security Violation Time Domain Violation OONOODOOUBRWN O O 241 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Appendix 2 Cause List APPENDIX 2 CAUSE LIST In accordance with the ITU X 733 recommendation Net Inspector reports the following causes of events and alarms Cause ID Cause 1 AIS 2 Call Setup Failure 3 Degraded Signal 4 Far End Receiver Failure 5 Framing Error 6 Loss Of Frame 7 Loss Of Pointer 8 Loss Of Signal 9 Payload Type Mismatch 10 Transmission Error 11 Remote Alarm Interface 12 Excessive BER 13 Path Trace Mismatch 14 Unavailable 15 Signal Label Mismatch 16 Loss Of Multi Frame 17 Receive Failure 18 Transmit Failure 19 Modulation Failure 20 Demodulation Failure 21 Broadcast Channel Failure 22 Connection Establishment Error 23 Invalid Message Received 24 Local Node Transmission Error 25 Remote Node Transmission Error 26 Routing Failure 51 Backplane Failure 52 Data Set Problem 53 Equipment Identifier Duplicatio
160. e dialog box es and starts pinging the selected managed object s a MIB Browser Opens the MIB Browser window If a managed object is selected this command automatically contacts the selected managed object by means of the SNMP GetNext request a Change Profile Opens the Change Profile dialog box which lets you assign a different poling profile and SNMP access profile to the selected managed object s Q Change Polling Engine Opens the Change Polling Engine dialog box which lets you assign a different poling engine to the selected managed object s a Resolve Device Address Forces resolving the device name to IP address at user request This is useful in environments using dynamic IP addresses in order to manually refresh the device IP address in Net Inspector e g after it has been changed by a DHCP server Note that this function is executed automatically anytime a managed object monitoring is enabled This command is available only for managed objects i e objects representing network devices a Manage Tools Opens the Client Preferences dialog box Tools panel which lets you manage user defined commands actions a NetFlow Source Sets the selected managed object as a NetFlow source device in Net Inspector i e a device that sends NetFlow v5 or v9 packets or sFlow v5 packets to Net Inspector polling engine this must be first configured on the given device e g a router using the vendor specific commands Net Insp
161. e filter scheme or delete it Editing Conditions To edit an existing condition simply double click it in the Conditions panel or select it and click the Edit button in the right section of the dialog box Example Editing a condition Advanced mode mD Edit S SS S Source hpjd1 Remove gt O Operat Severity lis y critical AND GQ Severity Major OR Warnina Informational Simple Advanced f Y Cleared The selected condition will be displayed in editable form see the picture above where you can select new items from the drop down lists or edit the value in the Value input line For description of available condition types operators and values kindly refer to the New condition toolbar description Click the Apply button in the Conditions panel to apply the changes after you finish editing the condition Note The Simple mode does not lets you change the condition type when editing a condition in the Conditions panel To edit an existing logical operator Advanced mode only simply double A click it in the Conditions panel or select it and click the Edit button in the right section of the dialog box This displays the drop down list from which you can select another logical operator Note In the Conditions panel green logical operators are active while white operators are inactive see the picture above Only active ope
162. e is displayed in one row comprised of the following columns Use checkbox If this checkbox is checked the corresponding SNMP access profile will be used for discovering the network Name The name of the SNMP access profile Version The SNMP version used in the profile Description The description of the SNMP profile You can click on any column header Name Version and Description to sort the profiles by that column Add button Opens the New SNMP access Profile dialog box which lets you create and configure anew SNMP access profile Edit button Opens the Edit SNMP access Profile dialog box which lets you edit the selected SNMP access profile Delete button Deletes the selected SNMP access profile if not in use Up button Moves the selected SNMP access profile up on the list Down button Moves the selected SNMP access profile down on the list 185 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Network Discovery Wizard Exports button Opens the Export Profile where you can save the selected SNMP access profiles to the XML file Import button Opens the Import Profile dialog box where you can select the previously exported file containing the SNMP profiles you want to import Configure Discovery Filter Step 2 In the second step of the Network Discovery Wizard you can optionally select or configure a discovery filter that will narrow down the discovery results by filtering out devices tha
163. e left panel contains the expandable map tree while the panel on the right displays all objects included in the map that is selected in the left panel The left panel also displays some properties of the listed objects including their object IDs To select a Source object and thus its ID click the relevant map in the left panel choose the object on the right panel and click the OK button Alternatively you can select one or more objects in the Maps window and then open the Create Filter dialog box This will automatically create filter conditions for selected source objects Source name Specifies the name of the object as displayed on the workspace which has triggered the alarm If this condition type is selected you can enter the name of the object into the Value input line Note however that two or more objects can have the same name Use the Source condition type to uniquely specify the source in such case Source info Specifies additional information about the problem as displayed in the Source Info column in the Events window If this condition type is selected you can enter additional information about the object into the Value input line e g Processor 1 Source type Specifies the type of the object which has triggered the alarm If this condition type is selected you can choose the type of the object from the Value drop down list e g IP etc Message A short description of the alarm If this co
164. e list of active alarms if present on the given object as follows Severity Displays the alarm severity level Date Time Displays the date and time of triggering the alarm Comment Displays the comment added to the alarm by a user Message Displays a short description of the alarm e g Device is down Ack Date Time Displays the date and time of acknowledging or unacknowledging the alarm whichever was last Message ID Displays the event alarm message identifier number e g 10002 EQ 30 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Net Inspector Client Main Window Source Info Displays information about the source of the problem For example in case of a threshold alarm it explains what threshold has been crossed e g Physical memory Add Info Threshold Displays additional information about the problem For example in case of a threshold crossed alarm it provides the actual value of the parameter e g 95 If SNMP agent on the managed object does not provide information for some section Interfaces CPU Storage the respective section is not shown in the tooltip 3 1 6 New Object Dialog Box To open the New Object dialog box select the Add New Object pop up command in the Maps window The New Object dialog box lets you create a new object of a certain type and add it to the selected map in the Maps window in two simple steps In the first step you need to select the type of the object
165. e list of private numbers as registered with IANA and stored on the Net Inspector Server Engine data nienterprise txt LO 58 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Properties Window OS input line The operating system running on the managed object URL input line and Open button The URL uniform resource locator address that provides additional information about the managed object By default this is the URL of the performance statistics page of the device To open the URL with the application associated with the specified protocol or URL click the Open button next to this input line Icon input line The name of the icon used for representing the managed object as configured in the Server Settings dialog box Object Types panel To change the icon for a particular object only enter the name of the icon file into this input line and click the Apply button Icon files are stored on the Net Inspector Server computer in the Engine workspace icon folder Icons need to be saved in PNG image file format and two files of different sizes 16x16 pixels and NxN pixels e g 32x32 need to be present for every icon Both icon files need to have the same name prefix with the large suffix for the larger icon file e g name png and name_large png Geographic coordinates frame The geographic coordinates that specify the physical location of the managed object The geographic coordinates are compatible wi
166. e managed object a The current status of the managed object LA 66 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Action Object Properties Windows 6 ACTION OBJECT PROPERTIES WINDOWS The action objects represent specific actions that are performed by Net Inspector Server when events occur Actions are used for notifying users of events e g via e mail and for fixing specific network problems reported by events in an automated manner e g by running a program script that performs the appropriate operation Authorized users can place action objects onto maps configure action object properties and monitor the action object functioning in the same way as this can be done for the managed objects Although being primarily used for notifying users about alarms on managed objects action objects themselves trigger alarms when they fail to perform the designated action e g send an e mail Furthermore the status of the action object changes if any critical fault occurs while executing the action Note 1 Actions are carried out on events not on alarms This means that for a single alarm two or more actions can be carried out by the action objects More specifically if no filters are applied the action will be executed when the event that raises a particular alarm occurs and when the event that clears this alarm occurs In addition the actions are carried out also when users manage the alarm acknowledge unacknowledge manuall
167. e managed object Properties window The New Edit Service dialog box provides the following controls Monitoring checkbox If this checkbox is checked the service monitoring is enabled Name Name of the service Type Service type e HTTP HTTPS FTP DNS SMTP IMAP IMAPS POP3 SSH Telnet NNTP NNTPS SIP H 323 LDAP LDAPS IPP LPD MsSQL MySQL or Oracle LA 62 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Properties Window Port Port number on which the service listens to Protocol Transport protocol used by the service TCP or UDP Username Username for connecting to service if supported and required Password Password for connecting to service if supported and required Service protocol data frame ASCII Binary radio buttons Specifies whether the service data is transmitted in ASCII or binary format Expect on connect input line and button Specifies the string that must be returned by the service when a TCP connection to it is established e g 220 for SMTP service Click the button next to this input line to display the Set Value dialog box which lets you configure the expected value using an operator none is contains and value string If the contains operator is selected you can also specify the start and end character numbers in the returned data that must contain the specified string Send Response list Lets you configure the send response values for querying a custom us
168. e only simply double click it in the Conditions panel or select it and click the Edit button in the right section of the dialog box This displays the drop down list from which you can select another logical operator Note In the Conditions panel green logical operators are active and the white operators are inactive see the picture above Only active operators are in effect A logical operator is active if it has at least two directly or indirectly subordinated conditions in the hierarchical filter tree Buttons a Add Adds the condition from the New condition toolbar to the Conditions panel In Advanced mode the condition is added to the selected branch in the filter tree a Edit Lets you edit the selected condition or operator Operators can be modified only in Advanced mode a Remove Removes the selected condition or operator and all its child objects from the Conditions panel LA 174 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Create Filter Dialog Box a AND Adds the logical AND operator to the selected filter branch This button is enabled only in Advanced mode o OR Adds the logical OR operator to the selected filter branch This button is enabled only in Advanced mode a Import Opens the Import dialog box which lets you select a previously saved filter and import it into Create Filter dialog box Conditions panel The Import dialog box lets you select the filter either from the My filters repository
169. e output errors Interface input unknown protocols Interface input error rate Interface output error rate Interface input discard rate Interface output discard rate a Host resources statistics Q Number of users LO 164 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Performance Manager Home Page Window Ooo Q Number of processes Memory used CPU Load Storage usage a Cisco statistics D ISS Se ee ee e ee e e e e e e e ee elef ee ee ee el D CPU Load Used memory Free memory Largest number of contiguous free bytes Interface in traffic rate Interface in packet rate Interface out traffic rate Interface out packet rate Interface in queue drops Interface out queue drops Round trip time Jitter source to destination Jitter destination to source Packet loss source to destination Packet loss destination to source Latency destination to source Mean opinion score MOS Packets out of sequence Packet loss unknown direction MIA Packet arrived after the timeout late arrival Echo round trip time Path echo round trip time TCP round trip time DNS round trip time DLSW round trip time DHCP round trip time FTP round trip time HTTP round trip time HTTP round trip time DNS part HTTP round trip time TCP connection part HTTP round trip time transaction part Completion status a Running processes statistics Q Q Q Process running status Process CPU load Process memory usage
170. e sub typed i e users can define sub types of a new type The Object Types panel provides the following controls Filter drop down list Is displayed in the upper left side of the panel below the title bar It lets you enter text that functions as a filter i e it displays only those lines in the Object Types panel that contain the entered text in selected columns To specify which columns will be taken into account click the filter symbol and select desired columns described below from the drop down menu that appears Then enter the text in to the accompanying input line which will serve as the filter criterion LO 142 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Server Settings Dialog Box For example if the Type name and Class columns are selected in the filter drop down list and you enter the string ip into the Filter input line the Object Types panel will display only those lines that include string ip in the Type Name or Class columns e g IP Type Name column Multiplexer Class column Object Types list Displays the existing object types and sub types in the following columns Type Name The name of the object type e g IP Class The class of the managed object e g Workstation If this field is blank it covers all possible classes any Vendor The vendor of the managed object e g MG SOFT If this field is blank it covers all possible vendors any Icon T
171. e to monitor supported services on non standard ports as well as configure and monitor custom user defined services Once configured the Services view displays the status of monitored services i e whether the services are accessible or not Note Services will be monitored only if services monitoring is enabled in the polling profile assigned to the given managed object How frequently the information displayed in this view is updated depends on the polling interval Poll every X seconds set in the polling profile The Services view contains the following controls The Services list contains information about network services in the following columns Name Displays the name of the service Status Displays the service status which can be one of the following Unmanaged monitoring is disabled Indeterminate monitoring is enabled and the first query is in progress immediately after enabling service monitoring Normal monitoring is enabled and the service is accessible Critical monitoring is enabled and the service is not accessible Port Displays the port number on which the service listens to for incoming connections 61 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Properties Window Protocol Displays the transport protocol used by the service TCP or UDP Scan button Starts scanning well known ports on the device for supported TCP and UDP services Detected services are added to the Services list To enable moni
172. eases with increasing connection data throughput bitrate and its color automatically changes from black to pale red with increasing link utilization If a link is down the color of the connection line is pure red The status and traffic is shown only for connections between those objects that support SNMP MIB II Interfaces table and for which the endpoint interfaces are known Displaying the status and traffic can also be enabled or disabled by enabling or disabling the Interface nodes option available in the Graphics toolbar Maximum value for connection traffic X Mbps input line Integer value that defines the maximum link speed in the monitored network e g 100 Mbps or 1000 Mbps For example if this value is set to 100 Mbps the thickest connection line will be displayed when the corresponding traffic either inbound or outbound data throughput reaches 80 Mbps Max number of events alarm per page in Search tab input line Integer value that defines the maximum number of events or alarms per page shown in the Search tab in the Events window 216 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Client Preferences Dialog Box Reconnect frame Lets you configure the Net Inspector Client reconnecting behavior At startup a Prompt radio button If this option is selected the Client will prompt you with a dialog box asking whether to re establish the last used connection or not Q Never radio button If this option is s
173. eckbox By checking or unchecking this checkbox you can manually clear an active alarm or manually unclear an alarm which has been previously manually cleared this makes the alarm active again The alarm is active when the Cleared checkbox is not checked Events cannot be managed Note Net Inspector system alarms i e alarms that have the Message ID value in the range of 10000 15000 cannot be manually cleared Y Acknowledged checkbox By checking or unchecking this checkbox you can acknowledge or unacknowledge an alarm If this checkbox is checked the alarm is acknowledged By acknowledging an alarm the user declares that he she is aware of it Events cannot be managed Severity Displays the symbol and description of the alarm or event severity level Date Time Displays the date and time of triggering the alarm or event The date and time format depends on the Date Time format parameter setting in the User Preferences dialog box Source Displays the name of the object as shown on the map which has triggered the alarm event El 46 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Net Inspector Client Main Window Comment Displays the comment added to the alarm by a user Each comment is automatically prefixed with the username of the user that has added the comment and the IP address of the Net Inspector Client from which the comment has been added Source Info Displays additional information about the problem For exampl
174. ector WorkGroup and Enterprise Editions incorporate a software NetFlow sFlow collector and analyzer module that receive NetFlow packets from source devices and provide NetFlow traffic statistics in the Performance Manager Home Page window NetFlow page a New Device Toggles displaying the New label for the selected managed object Managed objects that have been added to the system by the Auto configuration and network discovery features are automatically marked with the New label displayed in the upper left corner of the managed object icon Graphics view a Copy Ctrl C Copies the selection to the clipboard a Cut Ctrl X Removes the selection and puts it on the clipboard This command is available only when the map is in the edit mode o Paste Ctrl V Places the clipboard contents on the selected map This command is available only when the map is in the edit mode La 27 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Net Inspector Client Main Window a Duplicate Duplicates the selected managed and action object s This command actually adds new objects to the configuration New object s that are created with this command have the same properties as the source object s they have been created from except the object ID value and the name of the object The latter is composed of the name of the source original object and the _Copy suffix If an object with such name already exists an index number is added to the suff
175. el and click the Edit button to open the Edit Trap To Alarm dialog box Alternatively you can create a new trap to alarm rule by right clicking an alarm that is based on a received enterprise specific SNMP Trap or Inform message in the Events window such alarms have Specific SNMP notification alarm message and severity level of Warning and selecting the Create Trap To Alarm Rule from the pop up menu This opens a New Trap To Alarm dialog box first screen and automatically inserts filter conditions that match the SNMP notification attributes of the selected alarm This way you can quickly create a trap to alarm rule from a received specific SNMP notification e Specific SNMP notification alarm You can also edit the conditions to match your preferences before saving the new trap to alarm rule Description The New Trap To Alarm dialog box and Edit Trap To Alarm dialog boxes let you create and edit a trap to alarm rule in a wizard like fashion using two screens as follows First Screen Trap Filter Screen This screen is used for configuring a trap filter A trap filter contains one or more conditions that must be met in order for an SNMP notification to be controlled by the given trap to alarm rule and accordingly mapped to alarm These conditions are attributes of the SNMP notification like the enterprise specific OID variable bindings La 129 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Server Settings Dialo
176. eld with multiple input lines Lets you select the To or Cc carbon copy option from the To Cc drop down button and specify the e mail address of the recipient Pres the Enter or Tab key to go to the next line and repeat the procedure for another e mail recipient Server frame Mail server SMTP input line The name or IP address of the SMTP mail server used for sending outgoing e mails Configure button Opens the Server Settings dialog box that lets you view and modify the following parameters a Server The name or IP address of the SMTP mail server used for sending e mails a Timeout The timeout value in seconds for connecting to the SMTP server 70 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Action Object Properties Windows a Port The TCP port on which the SMTP server listens to for incoming connections the default SMTP port number is 25 For secure SMTP connections over SSL or TLS the default port numbers are 465 and 587 respectively Authentication frame Lets you configure the AUTH LOGIN SMTP server authentication parameters a Use name and password checkbox If this checkbox is checked the AUTH LOGIN SMTP authentication mechanism is enabled and you should specify the corresponding username and password in the input lines below You should enable this option only if the E SMTP server specified in the Server input line above supports the AUTH LOGIN authentication mechanism a Username The username f
177. elected the Client will not offer you the option to re establish the last used connection Broken connection after X seconds checkbox and input line If this checkbox is checked Net Inspector Client will automatically reestablish a broken connection after X seconds Graphics Panel Fill object name background with checkbox and color selector If this checkbox is checked you can select the color for the object name background displayed in the Maps window from the color selector If this checkbox is unchecked the object name background color is transparent Optimize drawing for Lets you choose the screen redraw option a trade off between quality and speed Quality radio button If this option is selected the text and graphics is anti aliased better quality Speed radio button If this option is selected anti aliasing is disabled faster screen redraw Sounds Panel This panel lets you control the audible notifications sounds which are emitted when alarms are triggered Play sound for alarms frame with checkboxes Lets you select the severity levels of alarms for which sounds are played i e Critical Major Minor and Warning alarm severity level Play mode frame Play once radio button If this option is selected the sound is played only once for each alarm when the alarm is triggered Note that the sound will be played only once if new alarms are triggered while the sound for the first alarm is
178. emove action filters Once the action filter is created it can be applied to action objects in the Filters view of the action objects Properties window Action filters contain one or more filter conditions which match the filter conditions available in the Create Filter dialog box The Manage Action Filters panel includes the following controls Filter list Lists the names of existing action filters Add button Opens the New Filter dialog box which lets you create and configure a new action filter Edit button Opens the Edit Filter dialog box which lets you modify the selected action filter Remove button Deletes the selected action filter Note that filters that are currently in use by action objects cannot be deleted 8 4 1 New Edit Filter dialog box The New Filter dialog box contains and Edit Filter dialog box contain a toolbar that lets you create filter conditions and add them to the filter one by one while the central section of the dialog box Conditions panel displays the entire filter consisting of filter conditions and relations between them The Conditions panel displays a filter in form of a hierarchical tree where filter conditions are connected with logical operators AND OR Action filter conditions can be specified by using the following controls in the New Edit Filter dialog box Name input line Specifies the name of the action filter 4 120 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference M
179. emoves all cleared alarms from the currently active tab of the Events window Create Filter Opens the Create Filter dialog box and lets you create filters for displaying active alarms in the Events window 231 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Menus Find Events Opens the Find Events dialog box which lets you search for alarms and events Modify Filter This command is used for modifying e g refining conditions of an existing filter i e either display filter or search filter This command is enabled only if a find or filter tab is selected in the Events window It opens the Find Events dialog box or Create Filter dialog box depending on which dialog box has been used initially and lets you modify the existing filter Save Filter Lets you save the search or display filter applied in the currently active tab of the Events window for later use The filter will be saved to the My filters repository which is stored on the Net Inspector Server computer This way any user can later load and use this filter This button is disabled if no filter of find tab is selected in the Events window Note that when saving search filters the time frame From To is not saved along with the filter conditions Load Filter Opens the Load Filter dialog box which lets you select a previously saved filter and apply it The Load Filter dialog box lets you select the filter either from the My filters repository which contain
180. end on type of the condition selected in the Search by drop down list Value input line Lets you enter the condition value Valid values depend on the type of the condition selected in the Search by drop down list Search within results checkbox Enables you to search only within the scope of the existing results i e a list of objects returned by a previously performed Find Objects operation and thus refine the search This option is enabled only if an existing Search tab in the Maps window is currently active OK Searches the entire user view for the matching object s and displays results in a new Search tab in the Maps window Cancel Discards all changes and closes the Find Objects dialog box Search Tab Pop up Menu By performing the Find Objects operation a new Search tab in the Maps window is created displaying the search results i e objects that match the search condition EJ 34 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Net Inspector Client Main Window Found objects are listed using the details view Besides the columns displayed in the Maps window details view an additional Submap column can be displayed in the Search tab The Submap column displays the name of the sub map containing the found object By right clicking inside the Search tab a pop up menu appears which contains the same commands as the regular Maps window pop menu and the following command a Open Containing Submap
181. ent resynchronization is performed h the given object and how Net Inspector monitors whether the events d or not for the given object e g a third party device These settings are used for synchronizing the events with arbitrary third party SNMP agents that support event resynchronization Command input line Specifies the command that triggers the resynchronization of events with a third party SNMP agent The syntax of this command is as follows a SNMPSET lt oid gt lt syntax gt lt value gt or b CMD lt command gt Add a SNMP Set request is sent to the given SNMP agent where lt oid gt is the OID to be set with the SNMP Set request lt syntax gt is the SNMP syntax of the OID to be set i e it can be one of the following integer counter gauge counter64 timeticks octet opaque ipaddress oid lt value gt is the value to be set Add b Command is executed on Net Inspector Server computer where lt command gt is the command including optional switches and parameters to be executed to trigger event resynchronization with the given SNMP agent managed object Enterprise OID input line Specifies the enterprise OID associated with the SNMP notification i e the value of the Ent snmpTrap terprise field in SNMPv1 Trap messages or the value of the Enterprise 0 variable binding in SNMPv2 and SNMPv3 Trap and Inform messages Each SNMP notification message tha
182. ents window displaying all events that match the action filter conditions useful for testing action filters a By importing a filter from a file using the Events Import Filter from File command and selecting a filter file from disk on the computer running Net Inspector Client only filters that have been previously saved to a file by using the Events Export Filter to File command can be imported To remove an existing tab from the Events window right click its tab symbol at the bottom of the Events window and select the Close tab name pop up command Net Inspector lets you save currently open display and action filter tabs with the Event Save Filters Layout command This command ensures that the existing display and action filter tabs are automatically restored next time the user opens the same user view Information about Alarms and Events The left border of the Events window displays the number of alarms events by their severity levels and the total number of alarms or events in the currently selected tab Place the mouse pointer over alarm symbol to see its description in a tooltip The right border of the Events window displays a toolbar with the following buttons Event Details shows or hides the Event Details sub window of the Events window IS Find Events opens the Find Events dialog box which lets you search for alarms and events EQ 45 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Net Inspector
183. er defined service If he binary option is selected you need to configure the send response values in hexadecimal notation where individual octets are separated by a dot e g 6F 70 65 6E To add a send response value pair to the list click the Add button in the right section of the dialog box This adds a new line to the Send Response list and lets you edit its send response values Send Response section contains the following components Send message column Lets you configure the value that will be sent by Net Inspector to query the custom service The value is specified either in ASCII plain text or in binary hexadecimal notation depending on the corresponding setting above Expected response column Lets you configure the value that must be returned by the custom service when the given message is sent to it The value is specified either in ASCII plain text or in binary hexadecimal notation depending on the corresponding setting above Add button Adds a new line to the Send Response list and lets you edit its values Remove button Removes the selected line from the Send Response list 63 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Properties Window OK button Applies all modifications and closes the dialog box Cancel button Discards all modifications and closes the dialog box Interfaces View The Interfaces view is displayed only if the SNMP agent on the managed object returns information pro
184. er or edit comment for the selected alarms Comments are displayed in the Comment column a Akcnowledge Acknowledges the selected alarms By acknowledging alarms users declare that they are aware of the alarms Acknowledged alarms are not shown in the alarm balloons a Unacknowledge Unacknowledges the selected alarms reverses the Acknowledge operation a Manually Clear Manually clears the selected alarms Note that Net Inspector system alarms i e alarms that have the Message ID value in the range of 10000 15000 cannot be manually cleared a Manually Unclear Unclears the selected alarms reverses the Manually Clear operation a Remove Cleared Alarms Removes all cleared alarms from the list LU 89 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual System Object Properties Windows a Find Events Opens the Find Events dialog box and automatically inserts appropriate search conditions for finding events or alarms associated with the given object o Export Opens the Export Events dialog box which lets you export alarms currently displayed in the General view of the Properties window to a HTML or CSV comma separated value file format The Export Events dialog box closely resembles the operating system s standard Save As dialog box Note that only information provided by the columns which are currently displayed will be exported o Select All Ctrl A Selects all displayed alarms a Table Options cascading menu
185. ers with administrator access rights are authorized to use the design mode 29 3 Description Besides the normal mode of operation which is described in preceding sections Net Inspector Client offers also a special mode of operation called design mode The design mode facilitates the process of creating user views by allowing authorized users to have more than one user view open active at the same time and to copy objects between active user views in normal mode only one user view can be open at any given time Only users with administrator access rights are authorized to use the design mode The design mode offers the same features as the normal mode except the event and alarm management features i e the Events window Create Filter and Find Events dialog boxes are disabled as well as the commands related to alarm management The main advantage of the design mode is that it allows authorized users to have more than one user view active open at the same time and to copy objects between active user views This can significantly speed up the process of creating user views 29 3 1 Working With Two or More Active User Views at the Same Time To open two or more user views In design mode you can open an inactive user view by selecting its icon in the Explorer window and choosing the Open pop up command or by simply double clicking such icon This will activate the selected user view without deactivating other active user vi
186. ers in Net Inspector system by displaying their user names access rights user groups and descriptions If the checkbox in front of a user is checked the user is allowed to access open the given user view in other words the user view is assigned to the user You can control which users are allowed to access the user view by checking and unchecking the checkboxes displayed in front of users amp 102 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Server Settings Dialog Box Assign All button Grants access to the given user view to all users assigns the user view to all users Unassign All button Denies access to the given user view to all users Full propagation checkbox Enables propagating the number of alarms from all the subordinated maps up to the root of the given user view otherwise the number of alarms is propagated only one hierarchical level higher If enabled this setting can reduce the application performance OK button Applies all changes and closes the dialog box Cancel button Discards all changes and closes the dialog box Pop up Menu To display the pop up menu select a user view in the User Views list and right click it This pop up menu contains the following commands a Assign Entitles selected users to access the given user view assigns the user view to users a Unassign Debars selected users from accessing the given user view unassigns the user view from users 8 1 2 Edit
187. ervice Services monitoring must be enabled in the polling profile that is assigned to the given device The following icons are used to indicate the current status of services Service is responding Service is not responding By clicking a service in the list you can view its detailed statistics in a dedicated web page Service Availability including history graphs of service availability in and service request response round trip time RTT in ms Processes Statistics The Processes frame in the Performance Statistics window displays the list of monitored processes their current status path process identification number PID CPU load and memory load for every process The following icons are used to indicate the current status of processes Process is running Process is stopped By clicking a process in the list you can view its detailed statistics in a dedicated web page Process Info This includes the graphs for CPU load and memory consumption Network Interfaces Statistics The Interfaces frame of the Performance Statistics window displays the lists of monitored network interfaces on the device as well as the current status address type speed and the inbound and outbound utilization rate for every interface The following icons are used to indicate the current status of interfaces 9 Up Interface is up Y Down Interface is down O Off Interface has been administratively disabled
188. es for ICMP HTTP DNS VolP jitter VoIP MOS etc Q NetFlow NetFlow sFlow reports TopN applications transceivers protocols conversations or countries for the selected router or all routers and interface or all interfaces Optionally use the Search facility in the right portion of the Time Reports frame to quickly find the reports that math the entered search phrase Click the report you want to view in the Time Reports frame The selected report is displayed for the previous day time frame You can sort the report items by any column e g device name value min max value by clicking the sort symbol in the respective column To view the report for a different time frame select the desired category from the Time interval toolbar drop down list e g day week month quarter year etc and optionally shift the displayed time frame forward or backward by clicking the arrow buttons e in the Time interval toolbar When the desired time interval for the report is selected click the Apply button in the right section of the Time interval toolbar to update the report to include the data for the new time interval 11 3 3 Status bar Status bar displays the name of the managed object whose performance statistics are displayed and the URL of the Performance Manager web page currently displayed 4 169 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Create Filter Dialog Box 12 CREATE FILTER DIALOG BOX 12 1 Pu
189. evice Panel status bar displays the total number of objects in the system T 206 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Ping and Traceroute Console Window 20 PING AND TRACEROUTE CONSOLE WINDOW 20 1 Purpose The Ping and Traceroute window is used for performing basic Ping and Traceroute operations 20 2 Opening The Ping and Traceroute window can be opened in several ways a By selecting Tools Ping and Traceroute Console command a By clicking the SS Ping and Traceroute Console toolbar button a By selecting the Tools Ping pop up command in the Maps window or in the Device Panel dialog box 20 3 Description The Ping and Traceroute Console window is used for querying managed objects on the network to determine if they respond to Ping ICMP Echo requests and to determine the route taken by packets across the network from Net Inspector Server to the specified host All queries in the Ping and Traceroute Console window are performed by the Net Inspector Server The Ping and Traceroute Console window contains the address drop down list and toolbar and two vertically divided panels The Settings panel on the left is used for viewing and configuring query parameters The Results panel on the right side displays the results of the Ping and Traceroute operations The Ping and Traceroute Console window provides the following controls Address drop down list The IP address or hostname of the host to be quer
190. ew menu commands or the corresponding toolbar buttons 3 1 Maps Window Net Inspector uses the concept of maps which are containers that can hold 1 objects managed objects action objects system objects 2 other maps submaps 3 graphic elements e g lines rectangles bitmaps etc An object can be a a managed object e g an object representing a physical device on the network Q an action object e g an object representing e mail sending functionality in Net Inspector a a system object e g an object representing Net Inspectors event storage subsystem As maps can contain other maps i e submaps they can be stacked in layers Due to this fact the terms map submap and sub map are used as synonyms in this document Graphic elements e g lines connections circles rectangles bitmap images artistic text etc are added to maps by users to enhance the visual appearance of maps e g to visually connect or group icons set bitmap wallpapers etc The Maps window displays the contents of maps i e objects submaps and graphic elements Objects and submaps can be displayed either by means of icons Graphics view where every icon represents one object or submap or by means of a table Details view where each row represents one object or a submap Graphic elements however are shown only in the Graphics view 12 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Net Inspe
191. ews Alternatively you can use the Server Settings dialog box User Views panel select the desired user view and click the Open button to activate it To close an active user view select it in the Explorer window and choose the Close pop up command 239 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Net Inspector Client Design Mode To create a new user view To create a new user view select the root node Net Inspector Server in the Explorer window and choose the New User View pop up command or use the Server Settings dialog box User Views panel To copy or move maps and objects between user views To copy a part of the user view from one active user view to another select the desired map icon in the Explorer window and use the Copy pop up command then select the destination map in another user view and choose the Paste pop up command This will copy the entire map structure and all containing objects to the destination user view To move a part of the user view from one active user view to another use the Cut and Paste pop up commands in the procedure above To copy move individual map objects from one user view to another or from one map to another select those objects in the source map in the Maps window and use the Copy Cut pop up command then double click the destination map and choose the Paste pop up command For more information on other commands windows and dialog boxes available in the design mode please refer to th
192. expected has been received 15014 NNTPS service failed NNTPS service is not responding to queries within the given time frame or a different response than expected has been received 15015 LDAPS service failed LDAPS service is not responding to queries within the given time frame or a different response than expected has been received 15016 IPP service failed IPP service is not responding to queries within the given time frame or a different response than expected has been received 15017 IMAPS service failed IMAPS service is not responding to queries within the given time frame or a different response than expected has been received 15018 Oracle service failed Oracle service is not responding to queries within the given time frame or a different response than expected has been received 15019 Custom service failed Custom user defined service is not responding to queries within the given time frame or a different response than expected has been received 15020 SIP service failed SIP service used for VoIP signaling is not responding to queries within the given time frame or a different response than expected has been received 15021 H 323 service failed H 323 service used for VoIP signaling is not responding to queries within the given time frame or a different response than expected has been received 250
193. f the alarm Severity Severity of the alarm Source Info Additional information about the source of alarm Value Value of the variable for threshold alarms only LA 157 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Performance Statistics Window 10 3 3 Status bar Here you can see which polling engine you are currently connected to and the full URL of the Performance Manager site you are currently viewing LO 158 11 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Performance Manager Home Page Window PERFORMANCE MANAGER HOME PAGE WINDOW Note This window is not accessible in MG SOFT Net Inspector LITE Edition 11 1 Purpose The Performance Manager Home Page window is a Java based web browser used for viewing the web pages of the MG SOFT Net Inspector Performance Manager web site If more than one Performance Manager polling engine is used e g in Net Inspector distributed setup this web site contains consolidated information from all polling engines 11 2 Opening To open the Performance Manager Home Page window select a device in the Maps Window and choose the Tools Show Performance Manager command or click the Show Performance Manager toolbar button 11 3 Description The Performance Manager Home Page Window enables you to browse the Net Inspector Performance Manager web pages In the Performance Manager Home Page window you can monitor devices polled by all Performance Manager polling engines and view associ
194. fetches the user preferences settings from the Server and initializes itself accordingly Due to this mechanism the user preferences are independent of Net Inspector Clients and thus independent of the user physical location For example if you set the user preferences option on a particular Net Inspector Server to display critical alarms in blue color critical alarms will be displayed in blue no matter from which computer Net Inspector Client you log on to that Net Inspector Server provided that you always log on using the same user account 23 2 Opening To open the User Preferences dialog box use the Tools User Preferences command 23 3 Description The left section of the User Preferences dialog box contains a navigation tree with two entries Depending on the entry selected in the navigation tree different panel is displayed in the right section of the User Preferences dialog box The following buttons are displayed at the bottom of the User Preferences dialog box OK button Applies all changes and closes the dialog box Apply button Applies all changes and leaves the dialog box open Cancel button Discards all changes and closes the dialog box Colors Panel The Colors panel lets you configure the colors and font styles used for displaying event alarm severity levels and states and thus also colors displayed in alarms balloons and rectangles and the colors that indicate the status of objects T
195. field This field is displayed at the bottom of the Colors panel and shows the preview of the settings in the selected view Here you can observe the results of your changes before applying them Event State View To display this view select the Event state entry from the Show settings for drop down list in the User Preferences dialog box Colors panel The Event State View provides the following controls Event states list This list is located in the left section of the Colors panel and displays different states of alarms and events new acknowledged manually cleared cleared Select a state in the list e g New to view or modify the text color background color and or font style bold italic etc assigned to it using the controls described below 222 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual User Preferences Dialog Box Colors frame Text color drop down list and Custom button The Text color drop down list displays the text color assigned to the selected alarm state By default this is Severity color which means that the text color assigned to the corresponding severity level is used If you change this setting it overrides the severity level color setting for example if the Critical severity level is assigned red text color and you assign blue text color to the New alarm state all new critical alarms will be displayed in blue text To change the color select another color fro
196. fy parameters of the selected SNMP access profile Remove button Deletes the selected SNMP access profile Note SNMP profiles that are currently in use i e assigned to one or more managed objects cannot be deleted Show usage button Opens a new tab in the Maps window Details view that displays all managed objects that have the selected SNMP access profile assigned Export Opens the Export Profile dialog box that lets you export the selected SNMP access profile s to an xml file on disk 116 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Server Settings Dialog Box Import Opens the Import Profile dialog box that lets you import an SNMP access profile from an xml file on disk New Edit SNMP Access Profile dialog box The New SNMP Access profile and Edit SNMP Access Profile dialog boxes provide the following controls Profile frame Name input line The name of the SNMP access profile Port input line The UDP port on which SNMP agents on managed objects listen to for incoming SNMP requests SNMP version frame and radio buttons The version of SNMP protocol used for querying SNMP agents on managed objects and for receiving SNMP Trap and Inform notification messages sent by those SNMP agents Settings frame The SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c community name settings This frame is disabled if SNMPYv3 protocol is selected in the SNMP version frame Read community input line The SNMP community name to be used with
197. g Box and the version of the SNMP protocol used for conveying the notification The enterprise specific OID specific OID which identifies an SNMP notification is the key condition that is checked first when Net Inspector receives an SNMP notification message If the specific OID value of a received notification matches the one specified in the trap filter the remaining conditions of the given trap to alarm rule are evaluated compared to notification attributes If the remaining conditions that are configured in this screen are satisfied the notification is controlled by the given rule meaning that it will either raise or clear an alarm The latter depends on the alarm mapping properties alarm severity message source info which are configured in the second screen of the Trap To Alarm dialog box New Trap to Alarm Rule x Rule name Raise PSU OFF alarm Critical Specific OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 661 6 0 3 Edit Name mcunitsupplyOfFTrap Variable Binding is Binding 1 OID is internet Y Edit Add Ba o gt Binding 3 OID is productName O VALUE is Intelligent Media Converter SYNTAX OCTET STRING Edit EBinding 4 OID is mcUnitIndex 1 VALUE is 1 SYNTAX Gauge32 Remove 8 Binding 5 OID is mcUnitDescr 1 VALUE is 20 Port converter chassis SYNTAX OCTET STRING Gear ECH Binding 6 OID is mcUnitUnitDescr 1 VALUE is SYNTAX OCTET STRING EN
198. g Capacity Response Time Excessive Retransmission Rate Excessive Software Program Abnormally Terminated Software Program Error Threshold Crossed Authentication Failure Breach Of Confidentiality Cable Tamper Delayed Information Denial Of Service Duplicate Information Information Missing Information Modification Detected Information Out Of Sequence 244 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Appendix 2 Cause List 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 1024 Key Expired Non Repudiation Failure Out Of Hours Activity Out Of Service Procedural Error Unauthorized Access Attempt Unexpected Information Other 245 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Appendix 3 Event Message List and Description of Events APPENDIX 3 EVENT MESSAGE LIST AND DESCRIPTION OF EVENTS The following event and alarm messages are built into Net Inspector Message ID Message Description 10001 Device is down Device does not respond to ICMP Ping queries to SNMP queries if SNMP polling is enabled and to none of the services queries if services polling is enabled within the specified time frame set in the polling profile 10002 SNMP agent not responding Device does not respond to SNMP queries within the specified time frame set in the polling profile 10003 Resynchronization failed The resynchronization of events between Net Inspector Server and the given managed object has failed Possible
199. gh events that satisfy either one or the other condition i e it will let trough all critical events and all major events If you on the other hand add two conditions of different types e g severity critical and message device is down they are connected with the logical AND operator meaning that the filter will let trough only those events that satisfy both conditions at the same time The Simple mode does not let you manipulate logical operators it only lets you configure and add filter conditions to the filter This mode also does not allow combining different types of filter conditions with the logical OR operator The Advanced mode which can be enabled by clicking the Advanced tab in the Conditions panel lets you create much more complex filters than the Simple mode as it imposes no restrictions on grouping filter conditions or using logical operators La 123 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Server Settings Dialog Box In advanced mode you can double click any logical operator in the hierarchical filter tree and change it from AND to OR or vice versa Furthermore you can add new logical operators to the selected filter subtree by clicking the AND or OR buttons located in the right hand side of the dialog box and then add new conditions as child items to those operators This way you can create complex filters that comprise more than two hierarchical levels which the Simple mode of operatio
200. ground colors of cells in tables listing events and or alarms e g Events window if Use Colors option is enabled Maps window Details view Alarms and New Alarms columns Device Panel dialog box Alarms and New Alarms columns etc as well as for displaying the background color of alarm balloons and rectangles shown in the Maps window Graphics view Icon color drop down list and Custom button The Icon color drop down list displays the color assigned to the graphic symbol of the selected severity level To change the color select another color from the Icon color drop down list or click the Custom button and select a custom color from the Select Color dialog box that appears These settings are used for displaying the colors of graphic symbols associated with event alarm severity levels in tables that list events and or alarms e g Events window Severity column Event Details window object Properties windows General view etc Effects frame Bold checkbox Enables or disables displaying the texts for the selected severity level in tables that show events and or alarms in bold typeface Italic checkbox Enables or disables displaying the texts for the selected severity level in tables that show events and or alarms in italic typeface Strikethrough checkbox Enables or disables displaying the texts for the selected severity level in tables that show events and or alarms in strikethrough typeface Preview
201. hat have the Message ID value in the range of 10000 15000 cannot be manually cleared as this could cause malfunctioning of the fault management application itself Severity Levels of Alarms Every alarm and event in Net Inspector has a particular severity level A severity level indicates the severity difficulty of the condition on the object To provide a better overview of alarms and events each severity level is assigned a different symbol and color User Preferences dialog box Colors panel lets you set the colors of alarm and event severity levels according to your preferences The following picture shows alarm severity levels listed from least to most severe their symbols and default colors The severity level of an active alarm can be Informational Warning Minor Major or Critical When an alarm is cleared its state changes from active to cleared however the severity level of a cleared alarm does not change By default cleared alarms have green background color By default cleared alarms automatically disappear from the Events window with the exception of manually cleared alarms Users can search for cleared alarms and display them in a separate tab of the Events window by using the Find Events dialog box Event Find Events The Find Events dialog box also lets you find and display events which trigger modify and clear alarms events are otherwise not displayed Tabs in Events Window The Events windo
202. he Colors panel provides the following controls Show settings for drop down list The Colors panel provides three views each containing a different set of color settings Select one of the following entries from this drop down list to display the corresponding view 220 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual User Preferences Dialog Box o Event severity Shows and lets you modify the colors and font styles used for displaying severity levels of alarms and events a Event state Shows and lets you modify the colors and font style used for displaying different states of alarms new acknowledged manually cleared cleared a Object status Displays and lets you modify the colors and font styles used for displaying different statuses of objects Load defaults button Loads the default values for the selected view event severity event state or object status Event Severity View To display this view select the Event severity entry from the Show settings for drop down list in the User Preferences dialog box Colors panel The Event Severity View provides the following controls Event severity levels list This list is located in the left section of the Colors panel and displays the event alarm severity levels Select a severity level in the list e g Major to view or modify the text color background color icon color and or font style bold italic etc assigned to it using the controls described bel
203. he OID input line Alternatively click the OID button next to this input line to open the Select OID dialog box and select the desired object from the MIB tree The OID of the selected MIB object will be inserted into the OID input line Name Displays the name of the OID specified above as it resolves through loaded MIB modules For user friendlier SNMP notification viewing and handling you should load the MIB module s that define relevant OIDs in the Server Settings dialog box MIB Modules panel LA 132 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Server Settings Dialog Box Syntax drop down list Lets you select the syntax of the OID specified above e g Octets Counter32 IP address etc Depending on the selected syntax different Value operators are available below Value operator input line and OID button Lets you specify the variable binding value From the operator drop down list select the desired operator e g is is not contains greater etc The list of available operators depends on the syntax selected above Then enter the desired value of the variable binding into Value input line If the OID syntax is selected you can click the OID button next to the Value input line to select the relevant object and thus its OID from the Select OID dialog box Position input line with spin button Specifies the position of the variable binding in the variable bindings list included in
204. he columns This command is available only in the Details view 3 1 5 Device Performance Tooltips To enable displaying the current device performance data in tooltips on the currently active map in the Maps window check the Enable tooltips checkbox in the Graphics toolbar Then hover the mouse cursor over a device icon on the map Graphics view to display the tooltip for the given device The tooltip displays the last retrieved device performance information interface CPU memory storage utilization rates if this information is available via SNMP and active alarms in a pop up tooltip Tooltip disappears automatically when you move the mouse cursor away from the device icon Click the titlebar of the tooltip to pin the tooltip window to the desktop and move it to the desired position on the screen e g to monitor device performance parameters and alarms in it The contents of the pinned tooltip window are automatically refreshed when new information is available You can horizontally resize the pinned tooltip window to match your preferences To close the pinned tooltip window click the Close X button in the upper right section of the tooltip window Device performance tooltips display the following information about the device the data is taken from the respective device Properties window Titlebar with pin symbol Click the titlebar to transform the tooltip into a window and pin it to the desktop You can move and h
205. he image and filename of the icon assigned to the object sub type e g Bl ip Derived From The name of the base object type e g IP the new type is derived from This field is blank for the built in types and sub types Add button Opens the New Object Type dialog box which lets you create and configure a new object type or sub type Edit button Opens the Edit Object Type dialog box which lets you view and change the icon for the selected type Remove button Deletes the selected object type or sub type The built in object types cannot be deleted Note Types that are currently in use e assigned to one or more managed objects cannot be deleted 4 143 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Server Settings Dialog Box New Edit Object Type dialog box The New Object Type and the Edit Object Type dialog boxes have the same appearance with the exception that only the Icon property can be edited in the Edit Object Type dialog box These dialog boxes provide the following controls New Type radio button If this option is selected a new type of object can be created from one of the built in base types Sub type radio button If this option is selected a new sub type can be created from one of the built in base types Based on drop down list Lets you select the name of the base object type e g IP the new type will be derived from or sub type of which you are creating N
206. he managed object with the same address If the managed object with the matching address exists in the Net inspector system its name is displayed in the Source field of the alarm or event that has been created from the notification If the managed object with the matching address does not exist in Net inspector the SNMP notification is discarded and no event or alarm is created Ignore SNMP notifications from unknown sources checkbox If this checkbox is checked Net Inspector ignores the received SNMP notification messages that could not be assigned to managed objects because no matching objects exists in the system Currently all such SNMP notifications are discarded Filter notifications through SNMP profile checkbox If this checkbox is checked Net Inspector checks if the community name in the received SNMP notification message matches the Trap community name specified in the SNMP profile that is assigned to the source managed object If the community names match the SNMP notification is converted to alarm and assigned to the managed object Otherwise the SNMP notification is discarded If this checkbox is not checked Net Inspector does not check the community name of received SNMP notification messages Registered ports list Port Displays the port number on which Net inspector Server listens to for incoming SNMP notification messages Transport Displays the transport protocol e g IPv4 UDP for each port Status Disp
207. hows or hides the gridline that can be used for evenly aligning icons and graphic elements on the map Enables or disables arranging object icons and graphic elements in the currently active tab of the Maps window onto a gridline E Brings the selected graphic element to the foreground layer e in front of all overlapping graphic elements H Sends the selected graphic element to the background layer e behind all overlapping graphic elements Lets you set the line border color of the selected graphic element D Lets you set the fill color of the selected graphic element Lets you set the line border width of the selected graphic element Lets you add a cloud symbol to the Maps window To add a cloud symbol first click this button then click the target location within the Maps window v Connection labels map in the Maps window Graphics view Uncheck this checkbox Check this checkbox to display connection labels in the current to hide the connection labels NE Click the A symbol to decrease the font size of connection labels Click the A symbol to increase the font size of connection labels LEO 24 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Net Inspector Client Main Window Check this checkbox to enable displaying the network interface status nodes e g at connection line endpoints in the current map in the Maps window Graphics view and to ena
208. i 44 Tabs in Events WINDOW EE a aaa 44 Information about Alarms and Events 45 3 4 4 ee e RE 48 3 4 5 Event Details Sub WindoW nora cnn 50 EE 50 Open a 50 RE 50 3 4 6 Filtering and Finding Alarms and Events 52 4 Sub map Properties WiINdOW cccccccsssesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 53 w3 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Introduction LL PUDO E 53 AR e EE 53 dr A O 53 General View A E ES ES O ES NN 53 Pr p gation E 54 5 Properties WINK OW e erasana cccaceiasdncnsdesceassveaduancdancuacddeiceasdsencucssdiatuedtiancuaaddeucedus 55 5T le 55 ER lee EEN 55 53 Descrip aos a 55 Canta a a sia 56 SYSE NV TEW EAN a EE 58 CU eS VIEWER A can tas es se os e dues ones lutea i cea ty 59 Services A Ee EENS 61 Interfaces VW a EE 64 Resources A dsc 64 SOTABE VIEW A A EE 65 A O A 65 MA A ies 66 6 Action Object Properties WiNGOWS eecceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 67 6 1 Mail Properties WINDOW gege dE KEES EES 67 6 1 4 e 67 EAN O e A NN 68 61 3 SDOSCIDLON EE 68 General AA A tee eier EEGENEN 68 CMOS VIEW id aaa 70 Message VIEW A A A at 72 li dee 74 AN EE 74 Bi items 75 SEATS O E Eda Saag cee RON 75 6 2 SMS Properties WINK OW cosacos ES 76 LC Nee 76 6 2 2 e e EE 76 Gi2 3 DOSCODION EE 76 n 77 Settings WE 78 VANAN EE 80 ASES EE SI BUS ee eege SI KEE 82 6 3 Command Properties WINdOW iio 83 E N 0 1 OOT E E 83 E E e ET 83 623 3 DOSCHOUO
209. ic elements lines rectangles ellipses and text Y Lock graphical elements Graphic elements i e lines rectangles ellipses images and object icons can be resized by dragging the element handles small grey rectangles that are displayed along the edges of the graphic element or the icon when it is selected To move a graphic element or an icon select it and drag it to the desired position 3 1 4 Maps Window Pop Up Menu The Maps window pop up context menu can be displayed by right clicking an object represented either by an icon Graphics view or a row Details View or by right clicking inside a tab in the Maps window This menu contains a list of commands specific to that object or tab This section describes the pop up menu available in regular tabs in the Maps window For description of the pop up menu displayed in chart tabs please refer to the Chart Tab Pop up Menu section The pop up menu in a regular tab in the Maps window contains the following commands some of them may be available only to users with administrator access rights o Properties If a managed object is selected this command opens the Properties window which lets you view and configure properties of the selected managed object If a system object is selected this command opens the corresponding system object Properties window If an action object is selected this command opens the corresponding action object Properties window
210. ied Toolbar Leg Ping button Starts sending Ping ICMP Echo packets to the specified IP host and displays the Ping results see an example ES Traceroute button Displays the route hops taken by packets on the network to reach the specified host E Abort button Aborts the Ping or Traceroute operation 207 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Ping and Traceroute Console Window Settings Panel The Settings panel occupies the left section of the Ping and Traceroute window It is used for viewing and configuring the Ping settings as follows Send X packets input line X is a number that determines how many successive ICMP Echo requests will be sent to the specified host when using the Ping command Timeout X seconds input line X is a number that specifies how many seconds the Net Inspector Server will wait for a response to each ICMP Echo request TTL input line A time to live number that limits the lifetime of ICMP packets to the specified number of hops Results Panel The Results panel occupies the right portion of the Ping and Traceroute window below the toolbar It displays the ICMP Ping and Traceroute results Example Ping results displayed in the Ping and Traceroute Console window Resolving www mg soft eu Pinging www mg soft eu 161 58 185 177 3 42 15 PM Reply from 161 58 185 177 time 127ms TTL 245 3 42 20 PM Reply from 161 58 185 177 time 128ms TTL 245 3 42 25 PM Reply f
211. ifications that match the given rule conditions to alarms according to the rule o Cancel button Discards all changes and closes the dialog box 8 7 Event Attributes Panel Purpose This panel is used for viewing and managing certain event alarm attributes e event message probable cause and event type attributes Description Users with administrator access rights can use this panel to view the list of built in event messages probable causes and event types as well as to add edit and remove user defined event message probable cause and event type values Administrators can also assign probable cause and event type values to user defined event messages User defined event alarm messages can be used in trap to alarm rules The Event Attributes panel contains 3 tabs Messages Cause and Event Type To switch to the desired tab click its tab symbol in the upper section of the Event Attributes panel La 137 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Server Settings Dialog Box 8 7 1 Messages Tab This tab lets you view the list of the built in event messages their message ID values and associated probable causes and event types The built in event messages cannot be edited or deleted It also lets you add user defined event messages to the list as well as edit and delete the existing user defined messages The Messages tab provides the following controls Messages List Displays the existing event
212. iguration Find Objects Ctrl Shift F Opens the Find Objects dialog box Select All Ctrl A Selects all items in the currently active window 230 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Menus 26 3 View Menu Graphics Toolbar Shows or hides the Graphics toolbar Events Shows or hides the Events Window Explorer Shows or hides the Explorer Window Device Panel Shows or hides the Device Panel Dialog Box Map Overview Shows or hides the Map Overview window 26 4 Event Menu Go To Source Finds and selects the object in the Maps window which has triggered the selected alarm or event Add Comment Opens the Add Comment dialog box that lets you enter a comment for the selected alarms User comments are displayed in the Comment column in the Events window Acknowledge Acknowledges the selected alarms By acknowledging alarms users declare that they are aware of the alarms Acknowledged alarms are not shown in the alarm balloons Events cannot be acknowledged unacknowledged Unacknowledge Unacknowledges the selected alarms reverses the Acknowledge operation Manually Clear Manually clears the selected alarms Note that Net Inspector system alarms i e alarms that have the Message ID value in the range of 10000 15000 cannot be manually cleared Events cannot be manually cleared uncleared Manually Unclear Unclears the selected alarms reverses the Manually Clear operation Remove Cleared Alarms R
213. iled description of the problem you are having before sending a support request e mail to lt support m g soft si gt This command is enabled only when Net Inspector Client is connected to Net Inspector Server Check for Updates Tries to contact the MG SOFT s update servers on the Internet to check if a newer version of Net Inspector is available for download If the newer version is available the MG SOFT s Updates download page automatically opens in your default Web browser providing one or more download links The Updates download page offers download links for the updates that are 235 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Menus available to you free of charge and those that require renewing your license additional payment Click appropriate link to download the desired software update with your Web browser After downloading the software please consult the Net Inspector Installation and Configuration Guide document or the bundled README TXT file for the detailed instructions on installing upgrading the software This command is enabled only when Net Inspector Client is connected to Net Inspector Server About Displays the About Net Inspector Java Client dialog box which provides information about the Net Inspector Client version and build number and the copyright notice If the Net Inspector Client is connected to Net Inspector Server this dialog box provides also information about the version and build of the Net
214. ilter by clicking the Add button in the right section of the Find Events dialog box Added conditions appear in the Conditions panel below the New condition toolbar Condition type drop down list Specifies the type of the condition You can select among the following types of conditions Q Severity Specifies the severity level of the alarm or event If this condition type is selected you can choose the severity level from the Value drop down list e g Critical Major etc Source Uniquely identifies the object which has triggered the alarm or event This condition type lets you search for objects by their object IDs note that different objects can have the same name however all objects have unique object IDs If this type of condition is selected click the Browse button next to the Value field to open the Select Source dialog box The Select Source dialog box displays two panels the left panel contains the expandable map tree while the panel on the right displays all objects included in the map that is selected in the left panel The left panel also displays some properties of the listed objects including their object IDs To select a source object and thus its ID click the relevant map in the left panel choose the object on the right panel and click the Select button Alternatively you can select one or more objects in the Maps window and then open the Find Events dialog box This will automatically creat
215. including the Custom SNMP settings profile while all other users view only the Custom SNMP settings entry If the Custom SNMP settings entry is selected you can specify SNMP access parameters by using the controls below 210 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual MIB Browser Window Timeout input line A number that specifies how many seconds Net Inspector Server will wait for a response to each outstanding SNMP requests before triggering a timeout interrupt signal Retries input line A number that determines how many times an SNMP request will be retransmitted after the first timeout occurs SNMP Settings button Opens the SNMP Settings dialog box that lets you specify custom SNMP access parameters for querying SNMP agents on managed devices SNMP Settings dialog box Profile frame Name input line The name of the SNMP access profile Custom SNMP settings Port input line The UDP port on which SNMP agents on managed objects listen to for incoming SNMP requests SNMP version frame and radio buttons The version of SNMP protocol used for querying SNMP agents on managed objects Settings frame The SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c community name settings This frame is disabled if SNMPv3 protocol is selected in the SNMP version frame Read community input line The SNMP community name to be used with all SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c queries sent by Net Inspector Write community input line This setting has currentl
216. ing the corresponding entries from the category drop down list displayed in upper section of the Command Properties window General View The General view contains the following controls Name input line Displays the name of the action object Type input line Displays the type of the action object Description input line Displays a short description of the action object 83 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Action Object Properties Windows Active alarms frame Displays the object alarm summary the total number of active alarms and number of active alarms broken down by severity levels and a list of active alarms on the given object Same as in the Events window The Command action object triggers the following events and alarms MessagelD Severity Message 10040 Critical Invalid filter 10044 Major Sending messages is temporarily disabled due to full buffer 10045 Critical Failed to run process 10050 Critical Invalid command line All alarms listed above change the status of the Mail object the status will match the alarm severity level Pop Up Menu To display the pop menu select one or more alarms in the list of active alarms The pop up menu contains the following commands a Details Opens the Event Details window which displays details of the selected alarm This window display the same information as the Event Details sub window a Add Comment Opens the Add Comment dialog box that lets y
217. input line to find all events whose message field contains the specified character s a Cause Specifies the cause of the event If this condition type is selected you can choose a cause from the Value drop down list e g Lan Error a Type Specifies the type of the event If this condition type is selected you can choose an event type from the Value drop down list e g Communication a Event State Specifies the event state If this condition type is selected you can choose an event state from the Value drop down list e g Acknowledged a Un Acknowledge time Specifies the Un Acknowledge time If this condition type is selected you can enter the Un Acknowledge time in the Value input line e g May 31 2011 9 23 50 AM o Un Clear time Specifies the Un Clear time If this condition type is selected you can enter the Un Clear time in the Value input line e g May 31 2011 9 23 50 AM o Event State info Specifies the Event state info If this condition type is selected you can enter the event state info in the Value input line e g Auto Operator Lets you select the operator e g is is not contains is greater or equal is smaller or equal etc Available operators depend on type of the condition selected Value Lets you enter or select the condition value Available and valid values depend on the type of the condition selected 4 122 MG SOFT Net Ins
218. input line DLSW round trip time checkbox and two input lines If this checkbox is checked the IP SLA DLSW Data Link Switching Plus round trip time threshold is enabled Enter the DLSW round trip time threshold values in ms into the accompanying input lines This way Net Inspector will trigger an alarm when the DLSW round trip time exceeds the configured value for raising the alarm first input line and clear the alarm when the round trip time falls below the clear alarm threshold value second input line DHCP round trip time checkbox and two input lines If this checkbox is checked the IP SLA DHCP round trip time threshold is enabled Enter the DHCP round trip time threshold values in ms into the accompanying input lines This way Net Inspector will trigger an alarm when the DHCP round trip time exceeds the configured value for raising the alarm first input line and clear the alarm when the round trip time falls below the clear alarm threshold value second input line FTP round trip time checkbox and two input lines If this checkbox is checked the IP SLA FTP round trip time threshold is enabled Enter the FTP round trip time threshold values in ms into the accompanying input lines This way Net Inspector will trigger an alarm when the FTP round trip time exceeds the configured value for raising the alarm first input line and clear the alarm when the round trip time falls below the clear alarm threshold value se
219. is displayed Every Net Inspector user has its own home page which is displayed automatically when the user opens the Net Inspector Performance Manager website Home pages can be customized to contain one or more custom reports graphs tables external web pages included as HTTP frames and or a map on which the user can drag and drop icons of devices and monitor their status User home pages fall into category of custom report pages and are configured in the same manner Devices tab When you click this tab the Performance Manager Devices page is displayed where you can view all monitored devices included in the currently active Net Inspector user view the current status of devices assigned polling engine and the basic device alarm information the number of alarms and severity of the most critical alarm associated with the device Alarms tab When you click this tab the Performance Manager Alarms page is displayed The Alarms page displays all active open alarms New alarms will be automatically added to the Alarms list as they occur after web page refresh and the existing alarms will disappear from the list after web page refresh when they are cleared Services When you click this tab the Performance Manager Services page is displayed The Services page displays a list all monitored services on devices by service category DNS HTTP IMAP SSH and a list of services with status Critical By clicking a service
220. ix e g _Copyl _Copy2 This command is available only to users with Administrator user privileges a Delete Del Deletes selected objects from the map This command is available only when the map is in the edit mode a Remove from Configuration Removes selected objects from the system configuration This command is available only to users with Administrator user privileges a Add cascading menu a New Submap Creates a new submap in the current map This command is available only when the map is in the edit mode a New Object Opens the New Object dialog box that lets you add a new object of a certain type to the selected map in two steps This method actually enables adding new objects to the system New objects appear also in the Device Panel dialog box This command is available only when the map is in the edit mode Q Import from CSV File Lets you select the CSV file from disk and opens the Import from CSV File dialog box that allows you to view and edit the list of managed objects devices to be imported and finally import new objects and add them to the currently active map in the Maps window Importing devices is one of the methods of adding new objects to the system Imported objects appear also in the Device Panel dialog box o Export Opens the Export Submap dialog box which lets you export the table displayed in the currently active tab of the Maps window Details view to an HTML or a CSV comma separated valu
221. k i e between the TF_SNMP_NOTIFICATION_BEGIN and IF_SNMP_NOTIFICATION_END reserved words The conditional notification block is executed e the reserved words are expanded and the regular text is copied to the output only for those events which originate from SNMP notifications that are not included in the built in notification to event mapping table For every other event the block is not executed and no output is generated The notification block can also be placed inside the for each loop Filters View The Filters view contains the following controls Available filters frame Enabled checkbox If this checkbox is checked the corresponding filter is enabled applied meaning that only events that match the filter conditions will be included into outgoing e mails sent by the given mail object Filter list Displays the names of available filters Manage Action Filters button Opens the Manage Action Filters dialog box Statistics View The Statistics view provides the following controls all input lines are read only Events processed input line Displays the total number of processed events since enabling the object or last resetting the statistics Successful input line Displays the number of successfully processed events since enabling the object or last resetting the statistics Last successful input line Displays the date and time of the last successfully processed event
222. k the Discovery Wizard toolbar button The Network Discovery wizard is also started automatically when the administrator connects to the Net Inspector Server for the first time after a fresh installation of Net Inspector when there are no managed objects in the configuration yet 16 3 Description Net Inspector incorporates an advanced network discovery feature that can discover devices and topology of your network in an automated fashion based on your input The Network Discovery Wizard helps you configure the settings for and start the network discovery operation in a few steps The wizard contains these controls Back button Go to the previous step of the Network Discovery Wizard Next button Proceed to the next step of the Network Discovery Wizard Start Discovery button Starts the network discovery operation after you have configured all the necessary settings While the discovery operation is running the Discovery is running message and a progress bar is displayed in the status bar of the Net Inspector Client main window To view the intermediate results discovered devices and subnets of the discovery operation select the Tools Discovery Panel command to display the Discovery Panel dialog box and open the relevant discovery operation in it When the discovery operation finishes the newly discovered devices are automatically added to the maps selected user view Cancel button Closes the Network Discovery Wiza
223. ked the external application and the output printed by that application Arguments frame and input filed Lets you specify program switches and parameters to be appended to the command line that invokes the application specified above To enable passing desired details about managed objects to the invoked program use the reserved words All reserved words start with the character The reserved words are replaced with the managed object attributes when the command is executed e g the S IP_ADDRESS reserved word is replaced with the actual IP address e g 192 168 20 15 of the managed object on which the pop up command was executed To view all available reserved words enter the character into the Arguments input field which open the drop down menu of available reserved words To add a reserved word to the Arguments input field select it in the drop down menu You can also combine regular text with the reserved words e g a IP_ADDRESS Currently the following reserved words are available ADDRESS hostname or fully qualified domain name of the managed object IP_ADDRESS the IP address of the managed object NAME the name of the managed object as specified in the Name input line in the General view of the managed object Properties dialog box URL the URL of the managed object as specified in the URL input line in the System view of the managed object Properties dialog box Preview frame
224. l About Users Access Rights and User Views 2 ABOUT USERS ACCESS RIGHTS AND USER VIEWS Each Net Inspector user account has certain access rights assigned User accounts have also one or more user views assigned User views differ in respect to what objects they include display The table below shows the user account types corresponding access rights and user views Account type Access rights User View Typical Administrator unlimited unlimited includes all objects Operator limited to managing alarms limited to a part of the network Guest limited to monitoring viewing alarms limited to a part of the network User accounts are created and managed in the Server Settings dialog box Users panel User views are managed in the Server Settings dialog box User Views panel C11 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Net Inspector Client Main Window 3 NET INSPECTOR CLIENT MAIN WINDOW The Net Inspector Java Client main window consists of the typical graphical user interface components like the title bar menu bar toolbar one or more windows and the status bar The following windows form the Net Inspector Client main window a Maps o Explorer a Map Overview a Events a Event Details The above listed windows are arranged side by side in the main window Windows can be resized by dragging their borders All windows listed above except the Maps window which is always displayed can be displayed or hidden by using the Vi
225. l Action Object Properties Windows a Manually Clear Manually clears the selected alarms Note that Net Inspector system alarms i e alarms that have the Message ID value in the range of 10000 15000 cannot be manually cleared a Manually Unclear Unclears the selected alarms reverses the Manually Clear operation a Remove Cleared Alarms Removes all cleared alarms from the list a Find Events Opens the Find Events dialog box and automatically inserts appropriate search conditions for finding events or alarms associated with the given object o Export Opens the Export Events dialog box which lets you export alarms currently displayed in the General view of the SMS Properties window to a HTML or CSV comma separated value file format The Export Events dialog box closely resembles the operating system s standard Save As dialog box Note that only information provided by the columns which are currently displayed will be exported o Select All Ctrl A Selects all displayed alarms D Table Options cascading menu Q Keep Cleared Alarms toggle menu option If this option is checked alarms that are cleared by Net Inspector remain listed in the current view otherwise they automatically disappear from the current list of alarms when cleared a Keep Manually Cleared Alarms toggle menu option If this option is checked alarms that are manually cleared by the user remain listed in the current view otherwise they
226. l cleared alarms from the list a Find Events Opens the Find Events dialog box and automatically inserts appropriate search conditions for finding events or alarms associated with the given object o Export Opens the Export Events dialog box which lets you export alarms currently displayed in the General view of the Properties window to a HTML or CSV comma separated value file format The Export Events dialog box closely resembles the operating system s standard Save As dialog box Note that only information provided by the columns which are currently displayed will be exported o Select All Ctrl A Selects all displayed alarms a Table Options cascading menu a Keep Cleared Alarms toggle menu option If this option is checked alarms that are cleared by Net Inspector remain listed in the current view otherwise they automatically disappear from the current list of alarms when cleared Q Keep Manually Cleared Alarms toggle menu option If this option is checked alarms that are manually cleared by the user remain listed in the current view otherwise they automatically disappear from the current list of alarms when cleared Settings View The Settings view provides information acquired from the corresponding config section of the Net Inspector Server initialization file Each configuration section in the initialization file e g config configl config2 is represented with one configuration object
227. l description e g Critical To view all reserved words click the Insert reserved words button at the bottom of this frame to open the Reserved Words dialog box which lists all available reserved words and their descriptions To add a reserved word to the Message input area select it in the Reserved Words list and click the Insert button By default the Message input area contains a pre configured expression which can be freely edited Send method frame The radio buttons below let you select the desired message sending method as follows Through GSM modem radio button Sends SMS messages through a GSM modem e g a GSM modem built into a GSM mobile phone connected to a serial port of the PC running Net Inspector Server The GSM modem must be correctly pre configured for sending SMS messages to the desired SMS center Direct link to SMS center UCP radio button Connect directly to the specified SMS center via a modem and sends SMS messages by using the Universal Computer Protocol UCP SMS center number input line The telephone number of the SMS center that will receive SMS messages via the UCP protocol and relay them to the recipients Sender number input line Optional telephone number of the SMS message sender Direct link to SMS center TAP radio button Connect directly to the specified SMS center via a modem and sends SMS messages by using the Telocator Alphanumeric Protocol TAP SMS center number
228. lays a short description of the user account Buttons Add User Opens the New User dialog box which lets you create a new user account Remove User Deletes the selected user account Edit User Opens the Edit User dialog box which lets you edit the attributes of the selected user account Change Password Opens the Change Password dialog box that lets you change the password for the selected user account 4 105 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Server Settings Dialog Box Pop up Menu To display the pop up menu select an account in the list of user accounts and right click it Pop up menu contains the following commands a Change Description Lets you change the textual description for selected user accounts a Change Group Lets you change the name of the user group for selected user accounts a Change Access Lets you change the access rights i e administrator operator or guest for selected user accounts 8 2 1 New User Dialog Box The New User dialog box is used for creating a new user account To open this dialog box click the Add User button in the Users panel of the Server Settings dialog box This dialog box provides the following controls Username input line Lets you enter edit the name for the user account Encryption drop down list Lets you select the password encryption method i e MD5 or None i e plain text Password input line Lets you enter the password fo
229. lays the current status of each port e g Ready Status bar The status bar is displayed at the bottom of the Properties window and provides information about the following object properties from left to right a The icon and name of the system object a The object ID of the system object a The current status of the system object La 97 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual System Object Properties Windows 7 4 Performance Manager Properties Window 7 4 1 Purpose The Performance Manager Properties Window is used for monitoring and managing alarms associated with the Performance Manager subsystem e g polling engines 7 4 2 Opening The Performance Manager Properties window can be opened by double clicking the Performance Manager system object icon in the Maps window or by right clicking the Performance Manager object and selecting the Properties pop up command 7 4 3 Description The Performance manager object represents Performance Manager subsystem This object triggers alarms if it cannot connect to configured polling engines Furthermore the status of the Performance Manager object changes to critical if any critical faults occur in the Performance Manager subsystem The Performance Manager polling engines can be configured in the Manage Polling Engines dialog box that can be opened by clicking the Manage Polling Engines button in this window General View The General view contains the fol
230. lder lt drive gt is the letter of the drive where operating system is installed e g c c On Linux usr local mg soft common SmiModules MibModules smidb 3 Click the Refresh button at the bottom of the MIB Modules panel to refresh the list of available MIB modules 4 Load the new MIB module s in the MIB Modules panel by selecting one or more modules in the list of available modules and clicking the Load button For detailed instruction on compiling and saving MIB modules kindly refer to the MIB Compiler User Manual that installs with the software 4 148 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Server Settings Dialog Box The MIB Modules panel contains the following controls Loaded Modules list Displays the names of currently loaded MIB modules To unload a MIB module select in the list and click the Unload button below Unload button Unloads the MIB module s selected in the Loaded Modules list The unloaded MIB module disappears from the Loaded Modules list and appears on the Available Modules list Available Modules list Displays the names of available MIB modules which are currently not loaded To load a MIB module select in the list and click the Load button below Load button Loads the MIB module s selected in the Available Modules list The loaded MIB module disappears from the Available Modules list and appears on the Loaded Modules list OK button Closes the dialog box and applies
231. ll buffer 14001 Major Failed to send message All alarms listed above except the last one change the status of the Mail object the status will match the alarm severity level Pop Up Menu To display the pop menu right click one or more alarms in the list of active alarms The pop up menu contains the following commands Q Details Opens the Event Details window which displays details of the selected alarm This window display the same information as the Event Details sub window Add Comment Opens the Add Comment dialog box that lets you enter or edit comment for the selected alarms Comments are displayed in the Comment column Akcnowledge Acknowledges the selected alarms By acknowledging alarms users declare that they are aware of the alarms Acknowledged alarms are not shown in the alarm balloons Unacknowledge Unacknowledges the selected alarms reverses the Acknowledge operation Manually Clear Manually clears the selected alarms Note that Net Inspector system alarms i e alarms that have the Message ID value in the range of 10000 15000 cannot be manually cleared Manually Unclear Unclears the selected alarms reverses the Manually Clear operation Remove Cleared Alarms Removes all cleared alarms from the list Find Events Opens the Find Events dialog box and automatically inserts appropriate search conditions for finding events or alarms associated with the given object Export Opens the Export Even
232. ll trigger an alarm when the interface outbound utilization rate exceeds the configured value for triggering the alarm first input line and clear the alarm when the same utilization rate falls below the clear alarm threshold value second input line In error rate checkbox and two input lines If this checkbox is checked you can enter the interface inbound error rate threshold values in into the accompanying input lines This way Net Inspector will trigger an alarm when the interface inbound error rate exceeds the configured value for triggering the alarm first input line and clear the alarm when the error rate falls below the clear alarm threshold value Second input line Out error rate checkbox and two input lines If this checkbox is checked you can enter the interface outbound error rate threshold values in into the accompanying input lines This way Net Inspector will trigger an alarm when the interface outbound error rate exceeds the configured value for triggering the alarm first input line and clear the alarm when the error rate falls below the clear alarm threshold value second input line Host Resources checkbox and input line If this checkbox is checked the utilization of device system resources like the memory usage CPU load etc will be monitored via SNMP In the accompanying Poll every input line enter the polling interval in seconds for monitoring host resources statistics Furthermore you can se
233. log box which lets you enter the IP range Start address input line Lets you enter the start address of the IP range End address input line Lets you enter the end address of the IP range Delete button Deletes the selected IP range Edit button Opens the IP Range dialog box which lets you edit the selected IP range Progressive network discovery radio button The Progressive network discovery starts by querying a single SNMP device and progressively discovers its neighbors and subnets by examining the routing tables and other relevant data on scanned objects You have to enter the IP address of the SNMP device to be scanned first SNMP agent address input line The IP address of the SNMP enabled device that will be scanned first LO 194 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Discovery Panel Dialog Box Scan entire subnets not larger than B class checkbox If this checkbox is checked and Net Inspector discovers a device that has a network mask that is larger than traditional class C network mask and does not exceed the size of class B mask it will scan also the entire subnet which the discovered device is a member of this can be time consuming Note that Net Inspector will always scan entire C class subnets it discovers however it will not scan entire subnets that are larger than B class Advanced button This button opens the Advanced Discovery Settings dialog box SNMP Profiles frame This frame le
234. log box section Editing Conditions For more information about editing existing conditions please consult the corresponding description of the Create Filter dialog box section Buttons a Add Adds the condition from the New condition toolbar to the Conditions panel In Advanced mode the condition is added to the selected branch in the filter tree a Edit Lets you edit the selected condition or operator Operators can be modified only in Advanced mode 200 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Manage Discovery Filters Dialog Box a Remove Removes the selected condition or operator and all its child objects from the Conditions panel a AND Adds the logical AND operator to the selected filter branch This button is enabled only in Advanced mode a OR Adds the logical OR operator to the selected filter branch This button is enabled only in Advanced mode o OK button Applies all changes and closes the dialog box o Cancel button Discards all changes and closes the dialog box 201 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Device Panel Dialog Box 19 DEVICE PANEL DIALOG BOX 19 1 Purpose The Device Panel dialog box lists all objects registered with Net Inspector and lets you add those objects to the Net Inspector workspace 19 2 Opening To open the Device Panel dialog box select the View Device Panel command or click the El Device Panel toolbar button 19 3 Description The Device
235. lor assigned to the selected object status To change the color select another color from the Text color drop down list or click the Custom button and select a custom color from the Select Color dialog box that appears If you select the Automatic entry from the Text color drop down list the default system font color will be used These colors are used for displaying texts in tables that show the status of objects e g Device Panel dialog box if the Use Colors option is enabled Background color drop down list and Custom button The Background color drop down list displays the background color assigned to the selected object status To change the color select another color from the Background color drop down list or click the Custom button and select a custom color from the Select Color dialog box that appears If you select the Automatic entry from the Background color drop down list the system background color will be used These settings are used for displaying the background colors of cells in tables that show the status of objects e g Device Panel dialog box if the Use Colors option is enabled as well as for displaying the object icon background colors in the Maps window Graphics view Icon color drop down list and Custom button The Icon color drop down list displays the color assigned to the graphic symbol of the selected status To change the color select another color from the Icon color drop down li
236. lowing controls Name input line Displays the name of the system object Type input line Displays the type of the system object Description input line Displays a short description of the system object Manage Polling Engines button Opens the Manage Polling Engines dialog box where you can add edit or remove polling engines Active alarms frame Displays a summary and a list of active alarms associated with the object Summary displays the total number of active alarms and the number of active alarms broken down by severity levels The list of alarms is displayed in the same manner as in the Events Window LU 98 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual System Object Properties Windows Pop Up Menu To display the pop menu right click one or more alarms in the list of active alarms The pop up menu contains the following commands a Details Opens the Event Details window which displays details of the selected alarm This window display the same information as the Event Details sub window a Add Comment Opens the Add Comment dialog box that lets you enter or edit comment for the selected alarms Comments are displayed in the Comment column a Akcnowledge Acknowledges the selected alarms By acknowledging alarms users declare that they are aware of the alarms Acknowledged alarms are not shown in the alarm balloons a Unacknowledge Unacknowledges the selected alarms reverses the Acknowledge operation
237. m the Text color drop down list or click the Custom button and select a custom color from the Select Color dialog box that appears These settings are used for displaying the text color in tables that show these states of events and or alarms e g Events window if Use Colors option is enabled object Properties windows General view if Use Colors option is enabled Background color drop down list and Custom button The Background color drop down list displays the background color assigned to the selected alarm state If the Severity color setting is selected it means that the background color assigned to the corresponding severity level is used If you change this settings it overrides the severity level background color settings To change the color select another color from the Background color drop down list or click the Custom button and select a custom color from the Select Color dialog box that appears These settings are used for displaying the background colors of cells in tables that show these states of events and or alarms e g Events window if Use Colors option is enabled object Properties windows General view if Use Colors option is enabled Effects frame Bold checkbox Enables or disables displaying the texts for the selected state in tables that show events and or alarms in bold typeface Italic checkbox Enables or disables displaying the texts for the selected state in tables that show eve
238. ma into the Filter Bar drop down list the active tab of the Maps window Details view will display only those rows objects that contain the string ma in the Name and Status columns e g Major Status marko Name tomaz Name etc see the picture below CA 101 x bp Tools Window Help Bae Hape Se Test sasi al MG SOFT MB subnet E gz Name a Status Alarms New Alarms Type Propagation Dep Y H markoi Q Major IP Propagating a vi U matjaz p4 Major aes ee es ee IP Propagating Y H matjaz t60p amp Major IP Propagating v tomaz hp8220 amp Major Ke IP Propagating Example Filtering objects in the Maps window Details view The Details view provides information in the following columns you can display or hide each column by clicking its name in the column selector E displayed above the vertical scrollbar of the Maps window Monitoring State checkbox A check mark in this checkbox indicates that the corresponding object is enabled For a managed object this means that the device it represents is being monitored by Net Inspector For an action object this means that the action functionality it represents e g sending e mails to particular recipients is enabled and its operation is being monitored by Net Inspector For a system object this means that the Net Inspector subsystem it
239. mail object These parameters are used by Net Inspector Server to send e mails LO 67 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Action Object Properties Windows through a SMTP server in order to notify users about events The Mail Properties window also displays alarms triggered by the given mail object itself 6 1 2 Opening The Mail Properties window can be opened by double clicking the mail object icon in the Maps window or by right clicking the mail object and selecting the Properties pop up command 6 1 3 Description A mail object represents a particular Net Inspector e mail sending mechanism that connects to the specified SMTP mail server and sends e mails containing event descriptions to specified recipients through the mail server The mail object itself triggers events and alarms if the connection with the SMTP server is lost or if the e mail sending operation fails for some other reason In addition the status of the mail object changes if any critical problem in e mail sending occurs Mail objects function globally meaning that they send e mails not only when events on the objects included in the currently active user view occur but also when events on any other object registered with Net Inspector occur By configuring and applying action filters one can restrict the e mail sending functionality of a mail object in various ways For example you can setup a filter that will allow sending e mails only for events asso
240. mask that is larger than traditional class C network mask and does not exceed the size of class B mask it will scan also the entire subnet which the discovered device is a member of this can be time consuming Note that Net Inspector will always scan entire C class subnets it discovers however it will not scan entire subnets that are larger than B class Advanced button This button opens the Advanced Discovery Settings dialog box Name The name of the discovery operation used by the wizard LA 188 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Network Discovery Wizard Results panel Create submaps for subnets checkbox If this checkbox is checked Net Inspector automatically creates and puts the discovered devices into subnet maps when devices are added to the workspace Target user view drop down list Lets you select the user view which the discovered devices will be added to Submap drop down list Lets you select or enter the name of the target submap i e submap which the discovered devices and their interconnections will be added to If the specified submap does not exist yet it will be created Preserve connections checkbox Check this checkbox if you want the Net Inspector to preserve manually added connections between managed objects when adding discovered managed objects and their interconnections to the submap This option is relevant only if the target submap already contains some managed objects and
241. mplex search filters criteria than the Simple mode as it imposes no restrictions on combing search conditions or using logical operators In advanced mode you can double click any logical operator in the hierarchical filter tree and change it from AND to OR or vice versa Furthermore you can add new logical operators to the selected filter subtree by clicking the AND or OR buttons located in the right hand side of the dialog box and then add new conditions as child items to those operators This way you can create complex search filters that spread over more than two hierarchical levels which the Simple mode of operation is restricted to 179 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Find Events Dialog Box Switching Between Modes To select desired mode of operation click the corresponding tab Simple Advanced in the Conditions panel You can switch to another mode even while you are already creating a search filter and then continue creating it in another mode however there are some restrictions While you can always switch from Simple to Advanced mode you cannot switch from Advanced to Simple mode if the current filter does not match the simple filter scheme max two levels of logical operators AND operator on the first level OR operator s on the second level conditions of the same type are grouped together under the same OR operator on the second level In such case you need to edit the search filter to match the simpl
242. n 54 External IF Device Problem 55 Line Card Problem 56 Multiplexer Problem 57 nE Identifier Duplication 58 Power Problem 59 Processor Problem 60 Protection Path Failure 61 Receiver Failure 62 Replaceable Unit Missing 63 Replaceable Unit Type Mismatch 64 Synchronization Source Mismatch 65 Terminal Problem 66 Timing Problem 67 Transmitter Failure 68 Trunk Card Problem 242 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Appendix 2 Cause List 69 Replaceable Unit Problem 70 Real Time Clock Failure 71 Antenna Failure 72 Battery Charging Failure 73 Disk Failure 74 Frequency Hopping Failure 75 I O Device Error 76 Loss Of Synchronization 77 Loss Of Redundancy 78 Power Supply Failure 79 Signal Quality Evaluation Failure 80 Transceiver Failure 81 Protection Mechanism Failure 82 Protecting Resource Failure 101 Air Compressor Failure 102 Air Conditioning Failure 103 Air Dryer Failure 104 Battery Discharging 105 Battery Failure 106 Commercial Power Failure 107 Cooling Fan Failure 108 Engine Failure 109 Fire Detector Failure 110 Fuse Failure 111 Generator Failure 112 Low Battery Threshold 113 Pump Failure 114 Rectifier Failure 115 Rectifier High Voltage 116 Rectifier Low FVoltage 117 Ventilations System Failure 118 Enclosure Door Open 119 Explosive Gas 120 Fire 121 Flood 122 High Humidity 123 High Temperature 124 High Wind 125 Ice Build Up 126 Intrusion Detection 127 Low Fuel 128 Low Humi
243. n for managed objects that provide this information via SNMP as well as the information about the monitored network services In other editions of Net Inspector which incorporate the full featured Performance Manager functionality the corresponding interface device performance statistics and monitored network services are displayed in the Performance Statistics window instead Some of the properties like the managed object name address description etc can also be configured in this window Furthermore the Properties window is used also for assigning SNMP and polling profiles to managed objects For more information about the sub map Properties window see the Sub map Properties Window section For more information about the Properties windows of action and system objects see the Action Object Properties Windows and the System Object Properties Windows section respectively 5 2 Opening The Properties window can be opened by double clicking the managed object icon in the Maps window or by right clicking the managed object and selecting the Properties pop up command 5 3 Description The Properties window contains several views displaying different categories of parameters e g General Settings System Users can switch between views by selecting the corresponding entries from the category drop down list displayed in upper section of the Properties window Note that some of the entries displayed in the category drop
244. n and privacy keys checkbox If this checkbox is checked the software uses non localized authentication and privacy keys OK button Applies all changes and closes the dialog box Cancel button Cancels all changes and closes the dialog box MIB Tree Panel The MIB tree panel occupies the left portion of the MIB Browser window below the toolbars It displays the hierarchically structured MIB tree consisting of nodes MIB objects defined in the currently loaded MIB modules In the MIB tree panel you can explore the MIB tree and select commands from the pop up menu for example to query selected objects on remote SNMP agents view node properties load MIB modules etc The following icons are used to represent MIB tree node types Object identifier node Object identifier node selected Scalar node Scalar node selected Table node 9 212 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual MIB Browser Window Table node selected CH Row node Row node selected Columnar node Columnar node selected Trap type node Notification type node Trap type node selected notification type node selected Object group node Notification group node MIB Tree panel pop up menu To display the pop up menu select a node in the MIB tree and right click it The pop up menu contains the following commands Note if the MIB node you are looking for is not displayed in the MIB
245. n is restricted to Switching Between Modes To select desired mode of operation click the corresponding tab Simple Advanced in the Conditions panel You can switch to another mode even while you are already creating a filter and then continue creating it in another mode however with some restrictions While you can always switch from Simple to Advanced mode you cannot switch from Advanced to Simple mode if the filter you are currently creating does not match the simple filter scheme max two levels of logical operators AND operator on the first level OR operator s on the second level conditions of the same type are grouped together under the same OR operator on the second level In such case you need to edit the filter to match the simple filter scheme or delete it Editing Conditions To edit an existing condition simply double click it in the Conditions panel or select it and click the Edit button in the right section of the dialog box Example Editing a filter condition Advanced mode A A A Edit Source hpjd1 Remove Wi Operator Severity x lis ano GQ Severity Major op emmer Cleared Simple Advanced The selected condition will be displayed in editable form see the picture above where you can select new items from the drop down lists or edit the value in the Value input line For description of available condition types opera
246. n list Lets you select a discovery filter in order to discover only those devices that match the filter conditions LA 193 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Discovery Panel Dialog Box Manage Discovery Filters button Opens the Manage Discovery Filters dialog box which lets you configure discovery filters Strategy frame This frame lets you specify the preferred discovery strategy as follows ICMP Ping checkbox If this checkbox is checked the ICMP Ping queries are used for discovering the network devices SNMP checkbox If this checkbox is checked the SNMP queries are used for discovering the network devices and their interconnections Scan ENTITY MIB checkbox If this checkbox is checked Net Inspector scans the ENTITY MIB on discovered devices via SNMP protocol and creates a managed object for each discovered entity If this checkbox is not checked entities are ignored and a single managed object is created for each discovered device Scan local subnet radio button If this option is selected Net Inspector discovers the network devices and their connections within the local subnet i e subnet the PC running Net Inspector Server is a member of Scan IP range radio button If this option is selected Net Inspector discovers the network within the range of IP addresses specified in the input lines below IP ranges list Lists the configured IP address ranges Add button Opens the IP Range dia
247. n list and input line If this checkbox is checked new managed objects devices are automatically added to the workspace i e to the user view X and the map Y specified in the accompanying drop down list and input line respectively If no map is specified the managed object icons are placed to the root of the selected user view Apply Changes button Applies the changes without closing the dialog box OK button Applies the changes and closes the dialog box 4 150 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Manage Polling Engines Dialog Box 9 MANAGE POLLING ENGINES DIALOG BOX 9 1 1 Purpose The Manage Polling Engines dialog box is used for viewing adding editing and removing Performance Manager polling engines 9 1 2 Opening To open this dialog box click the Manage Polling Engines button in the Performance Manager Properties window The Performance Manager Properties window can be opened by double clicking the Performance Manager system object icon in the Maps window or by right clicking the Performance Manager object and selecting the Properties pop up command 9 1 3 Description This dialog box has the same appearance and is used in the same way as the Polling Engines Panel LA 151 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Performance Statistics Window 10 PERFORMANCE STATISTICS WINDOW Note This window is not accessible in MG SOFT Net Inspector LITE Edition 10 1 Purpose The Perf
248. n object and on the objects within the given submap respectively As alarm balloons rectangles that indicate the total number of active alarms also dynamically appear and disappear when objects are enabled A rectangle symbol appears in the lower right section of the object icon when at least one active alarm exists on that object and disappears when no more active alarms exist on that object Le when all alarms are cleared Similarly a rectangle appears on the submap icon if at least one active alarm exists on the objects within that submap or any of its submaps if alarm propagation is not disabled and such alarm balloon disappears when no more active alarms exist on those objects The alarm rectangle on the object icon displays the total number of active alarms that currently exist on that object The alarm rectangle on the submap icon displays the total number of active alarms that currently exist on the objects within that submap Note The alarm numbers are propagated only one hierarchical level higher while alarm severity colors are propagated up to the top level submap s of the user view The alarm rectangle on the object icon automatically changes its color to match the color of the most severe alarm that currently exists on that object The alarm rectangle on the submap icon reflects the color of the most severe alarm that exists on the objects within the given submap and all its submaps The picture above displays the alarm se
249. n the Reserved Words dialog box which lists available reserved words and their descriptions To add a reserved word to the e mail body select it in the Reserved Words list and click the Insert button Alternatively you can load and use one of the built in e mail body templates by clicking the Load template button and selecting the desired template from the Select Template dialog box that appears The Select Template dialog box consists of two panels The upper panel displays the names of the e mail body templates and the lower panel shows the contents of the template selected in the upper panel Choose the desired template in the upper panel and click the Select button to add the selected template to the e mail body and close the Select Template dialog box The contents of the selected template appears in the Body input area of the Mail Properties dialog box You can then use the template as it is or edit it to adjust it to your preferences Send as HTML checkbox Enables or disables sending e mails in HTML format Load template button Opens the Select Template dialog box which lets you select e mail body templates Insert Button Opens the Reserved Words dialog box which lets you add reserved words to the e mail body 72 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Action Object Properties Windows Description of Reserved Words a The following reserved words are available for all events
250. n those objects are acknowledged or cleared The alarm balloon above the object icon displays the number of new alarms that currently exist on that object The alarm balloon above the submap icon displays the number of new alarms that currently exist on the objects within that submap Note The alarm numbers are propagated only one hierarchical level higher while alarm severity colors are propagated up to the top level submap s of the user view EA 20 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Net Inspector Client Main Window An alarm balloon automatically changes its color to match the color of the most severe new alarm that currently exists on the object In case of a submap the alarm balloon reflects the color of the most severe new alarm that exists on the objects within the given map branch i e in the given map and its submaps Alarm severity level colors can be configured in the User Preferences dialog box The alarm severity levels and their default colors and thus also the default colors of alarm balloons are The alarm severity levels their symbols and default colors listed from least to most severe Indicating Total Number of Active Alarms Besides the alarm balloons which display the number and severity of new alarms i e active alarm that are not acknowledged small rectangles in the lower right section of object and submap icons indicate the total number and severity level of active alarms on the give
251. nagement functionalities NetFlow source checkbox Sets the selected managed object as a NetFlow source device i e a device that sends NetFlow v5 or v9 packets or sFlow v5 packets to Net Inspector this must be first configured on the given device e g a router using the vendor specific commands Net Inspector WorkGroup and Enterprise Editions incorporate a NetFlow sFlow collector and analyzer software module that receives NetFlow and sFlow packets from source devices and provide NetFlow sFlow traffic statistics in the LA 56 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Properties Window Performance Manager Home Page window NetFlow page This option is disabled if the given device is polled by Net Inspector Server Built in engine Active alarms frame Displays the object alarm summary the total number of active alarms and number of active alarms broken down by severity levels and a list of active alarms on the given object same as in the Events window Pop Up Menu To display the pop menu right click one or more alarms in the list of active alarms The pop up menu contains the following commands a Details Opens the Event Details window which displays details of the selected alarm This window display the same information as the Event Details sub window a Add Comment Opens the Add Comment dialog box that lets you enter or edit comment for the selected alarms Comments are displayed in the Comment column a Ackno
252. ndition type and the operator is or is not is selected you can choose a message from the list of all messages in the Value drop down list e g Device is down If this condition type and the operator contains is selected you can enter a text string e g Dev into the Value input line to find all alarms whose message field contains the specified character s Cause Specifies the cause of the alarm If this condition type is selected you can choose a cause from the Value drop down list e g Lan Error Type Specifies the type of the alarm If this condition type is selected you can choose an alarm type from the Value drop down list e g Communication La 171 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Create Filter Dialog Box a Event state Specifies the siate of the alarm or event If this condition type is selected you can choose an event or alarm state from the Value drop down list e g ACKNOWLEDGED or MANUALLY CLEARED or UNCLEARED etc a Un Acknowledge time Specifies the date and time of acknowledging or unacknowledging the alarm or event If this condition type is selected you can enter the desired date and time into the Value input line using the date and time formatting as configured in the user preferences eg Sep 12 2008 12 45 12 PM a Un Clear time Specifies the date and time of clearing or unclearing the alarm or event If this condition type i
253. nds Ranes E iia 217 LOOMS Panels a e dd lle dos Bla toa a A 218 22 3 1 Custom Action dialog box 218 23 User Preferences Dialog BOX ccccccssssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeees 220 23 PUDO a 220 29 2 O EE 220 PO OSE M PE Os AEE EA chia 220 Colors Panel EIEEE AEE hl ed a 220 Bomme Pal NA 225 8 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Introduction 24 Print DiglO GiB OX rana 226 A te 226 24 2 OPENING EE 226 243 DESCHIDUON EE 226 25 Windows Dialog BOX isin cion ic 228 AR te 228 ET e EE 228 Py DISPO di obs 228 26 A A A A A 229 26 1 File Me iio rico 229 E eg EE 230 20 3 VIOW MN Usain da A doi 231 ZO Event MMU A t 231 26 5 Map A ata Ween tated E UN cee ee ee ea 233 20 0 TOG En araea aa aa Ea Aa a a a A a ia aSa dial 234 20 7 ele EE EE 234 26 8 Help Me Uco a 235 AAPP A 237 26 SIS Bal ai A AAA DRA 238 29 Net Inspector Client Design Mode cooooonnnncccccccncccnonnnananannccnonenonnnnnnnnanccnnnnnnnos 239 29 tee EE 239 A A reir PRETEEN A tC me e 239 EIERE 239 29 3 1 Working With Two or More Active User Views at the Same Time 239 Appendix 1 Event Type LiSt cuiccommicisnicionmacinenacnianen darian tiran rinda nitdas 241 Appendix 2 Cause LISU wiscciecccuccdcicccaacsincwenduedccendvancueaduadediadeacedanduasaciucudacventeaneutudde 242 Appendix 3 Event Message List and Description of Event sssssssssseeeeeees 246 9 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Introduction
254. nected to Net Inspector Server Possible reasons alarm panel client is not running a firewall is blocking connections to Net Inspector Server 246 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Appendix 3 Event Message List and Description of Events 10102 Alarm panel identification is used The alarm panel IP address ID combination or invalid is already used or invalid 10103 Alarm panel user view name is The alarm panel user view name setting is invalid invalid 10201 Failed to load configuration Cannot load the given configuration database Possible reasons configuration file does not exists configuration database instance or catalog does not exist 10202 Failed to connect to configuration Cannot connect to the configuration database database Possible reasons incorrect settings database not reachable 10203 Failed to read from configuration Cannot read from the configuration database database Possible reasons insufficient user rights 10204 Failed to initialize OpenMN Cannot initialize the OpenMN subsystem subsystem Possible reasons multicast port for receiving OpenMN notifications cannot be registered 10210 Failed to connect to event storage Cannot connect to the event storage database database Possible reasons incorrect settings database not reachable 10211 Failed to initialize event storage Cannot create or retrieve tables from the database even
255. ng tab and the SNMP tab 8 3 1 Polling Tab The Polling tab is used for managing polling profiles It provides the following controls Polling list Displays a list of existing polling profiles 4 108 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Server Settings Dialog Box Add button Opens the New Polling Profile dialog box which lets you create and configure a new polling profile Edit button Opens the Edit Polling Profile dialog box which lets you view and modify the properties of the selected polling profile Remove button Deletes the selected polling profile Note Polling profiles that are currently in use e assigned to one or more managed objects cannot be deleted Show usage button Opens a new tab in the Maps window Details view that displays all managed objects that have the selected polling profile assigned Export Opens the Export Profile dialog box that lets you export the selected polling profile s to XML file s on disk Import Opens the Import Profile dialog box that lets you import a polling profile from an XML file on disk New Edit Polling Profile Dialog Box The New Polling Profile and Edit Polling Profile dialog boxes provide the following controls Profile frame Name input line The name of the polling profile General frame Check every input line Specifies the interval in seconds for checking the managed object status and SNMP agent state i e ICMP Echo and S
256. ng the context menus right click BEI MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Net Inspector Client Main Window Hand tool When this button is selected the mouse cursor cursor is represented with hand symbol It is used for easier navigation panning within the map graphics view Click and hold down the left mouse button and drag the map to pan it and display the map portion you want to view unless the entire map is already displayed Connection tool It lets you add a connection line between two icons in the Maps window an optionally name the connection endpoints To add a connection line select this button and click the first and the second device icon that you want to connect A connection line will appear connecting the two icons and the Interfaces dialog box will be displayed to let you select the network interfaces used on both ends of the connection if this information is available If you select a network interface on one or both connected devices a network interface status node e g appears at the corresponding end of the connection line by default if interface nodes are not disabled The interface node represents the current status of the network interface used for the given connection In addition the description of the selected interface automatically appears as a label on the corresponding end of the connection line by default if connection labels are not disabled A connection line can have 3
257. ng their object IDs To select a Source object and thus its ID click the relevant map in the left panel choose the object on the right panel and click the Select button Source name Specifies the name of the object as displayed on the workspace which has triggered the event If this condition type is selected you can enter the name of the object into the Value input line Note however that two or more objects can have the same name Use the Source condition type to uniquely specify the source in such case Source info Specifies additional information about the problem which has triggered the event as displayed in the Source Info column in the Events window If this condition type is selected you can enter additional information about the object into the Value input line e g Processor 1 Source type Specifies the type of the object which has triggered the event If this condition type is selected you can choose the type of the object from the Value drop down list e g IP etc Message A short description of the event If this condition type and the operator is or is not is selected you can choose a message from the list of all messages in the Value drop down list e g Device is down If this condition type and the operator 121 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Server Settings Dialog Box contains is selected you can enter a text string eg Devi into the Value
258. ng to Net Inspector queries gt lt A Action operation e g e mail sending is LA critical enabled but it fails to perform its function due to at least one critical fault S Net Inspector subsystem e g event storage subsystem is enabled but it fails to perform its function due to at least one critical fault By default the background of the map icon reflects the color of the most critical status that can be found among the objects in the given map and all its submaps The map propagation options can be configured in the Propagation view of the sub map Properties window Note Object status colors can be configured in the User Preferences dialog box Colors panel Indication and Propagation of Alarms in the Maps window Alarm Balloons Small graphic symbols called alarm balloons Ki dynamically appear and disappear above the icons that represent managed objects action objects system objects and sub maps if objects are not disabled An alarm balloon appears above an object icon when at least one new alarm i e active alarm that is not acknowledged exists on that object and disappears when all alarms associated with the object are acknowledged or cleared Similarly an alarm balloon appears above the submap icon is displayed if at least one new alarm exists on the objects within that submap or any of its submaps if alarm propagation is not disabled and such alarm balloon disappears when all alarms o
259. ngle matches your preferences Insert Ellipse Lets you draw an ellipse to the Maps window by clicking and holding down the mouse button while dragging the mouse pointer across the Maps window Release the mouse button when the size of the ellipse circle matches your preferences Insert Text Lets you add text to the Maps window To add text click within the Maps window at the point where the text should start This opens the Text Editor dialog box Enter the text into the Text Editor dialog box adjust the font type and size to meet your preferences and click the OK button to close the dialog and display the entered text in the Maps window To edit existing text select this command and then click the text to be edited in the Maps window to open the text in the Text Editor dialog box where you can edit it Insert Image Lets you add a bitmap image to the Maps window by clicking within the Maps window and choosing an image file JPG BMP or PNG format from the Select Image dialog box that appears Note The image file must be stored on the computer running Net Inspector Server in the Engine folder or its subfolders 233 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Menus 26 6 Tools Menu Change Password Opens the Change Password dialog box that lets you change the password for the selected user account Ping and Traceroute Console Opens the Ping and Traceroute Console window and lets you query remote managed objects on
260. notification s to which the rule applies Alarm Severity Displays the configured severity level of the alarm Alarm Message Displays the configured alarm message Buttons Add button Opens the New Trap To Alarm dialog box which lets you create and configure a new trap to alarm rule Edit button Opens the Edit Trap To Alarm dialog box which lets you modify the selected trap to alarm rule La 128 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Server Settings Dialog Box Duplicate button Creates a copy of the selected trap to alarm rule After creating a copy of an existing rule you should edit the properties of the new rule This option lets you quickly create new trap to alarm rules that are similar to existing Source rules Remove button Deletes the selected trap to alarm rule s 8 6 1 New Edit Trap To Alarm Dialog Box Purpose The New Trap To Alarm dialog box and Edit Trap To Alarm dialog box let you create a new and edit an existing trap to alarm mapping rule in two steps In the first step you specify the condition s an SNMP notification has to meet to be controlled by the rule In the second step you specify the alarm severity level alarm text message and optionally the source info property of the resulting alarm Opening Click the Add button in the Trap To Alarm Rules panel to open the New Trap To Alarm dialog box Select an existing trap to alarm rule in the Trap To Alarm Rules pan
261. nter the device data storage unit usage threshold values in into the accompanying input lines This way Net Inspector will trigger an alarm when the device storage usage exceeds the configured value for raising the alarm first input line and clear the alarm when the storage usage falls below the clear alarm threshold value second input line Processes checkbox and input line If this checkbox is checked the processes running on devices supporting the HOST RESOURCES MIB module will be monitored via SNMP The process information e process name running status process memory usage and process CPU usage will be displayed only for the selected processes Into the accompanying Poll every input line enter the polling interval in seconds for monitoring processes Furthermore you can set the threshold values for triggering and clearing alarms associated with the process status and resources consumption Collected information will be displayed in the Processes frame in the Device Statistics window Process status checkbox If this checkbox is checked Net Inspector monitors the status of processes on the given managed object and triggers alarm if any of the processes stop running The alarm is automatically cleared when the process Is running again Process CPU checkbox and two input lines If this checkbox is checked you can enter the processes CPU load threshold values in into the accompanying input lines This way Net
262. ntral section of the connection line Position drop down list Lets you select the position of the label relative to the connection line left right center Auto rotation enabled left checkbox If this checkbox is checked the label text is automatically rotated aligned with the connection line if you reposition any of the two objects the line is connecting Right label input line Lets you specify the right label for the connection e g a link name displayed on right hand side or lower section in vertical lines of the connection line Position drop down list Lets you select the position of the label relative to the connection line left right center Auto rotation enabled left checkbox If this checkbox is checked the label text is automatically rotated aligned with the connection line if you reposition any of the two objects the line is connecting Interfaces frame Lets you select the network interfaces used on both ends of the connection e g interface name This information is used for presenting the interface status nodes e g at connection line endpoints Interface status nodes are displayed for devices that support the standard SNMP MIB II Interfaces group of objects and for which the connection endpoint interfaces are selected Source drop down list Specifies the name of the source endpoint device and lets you select the network interface on that device used for establishing the given connection
263. nts and or alarms in italic typeface Strikethrough checkbox Enables or disables displaying the texts for the selected state in tables that show events and or alarms in strikethrough typeface Note These effect settings are merged with the effect settings for the corresponding event alarm severity levels for example if the New alarm state is assigned the bold effect and you assign the italic effect to the Critical alarm then all new critical alarms will be displayed in bold and italic typeface 223 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual User Preferences Dialog Box Preview field This field is displayed at the bottom of the Colors panel and shows the preview of the settings in the selected view Here you can observe the results of your changes before applying them Object Status View To display this view select the Object status entry from the Show settings for drop down list in the User Preferences dialog box Colors panel The Object Status View provides the following controls Object status list This list is located in the left section of the Colors panel and displays the object statuses Select a status in the list e g Critical to view or modify the text color background color and or font style bold italic etc assigned to it using the controls described below Colors frame Text color drop down list and Custom button The Text color drop down list displays the text co
264. ny This command is available only when a sub map icon is selected in the Explorer window a New Submap Creates a new sub map below the selected map or active user view This command is available only when a sub map or an active user view icon is selected in the Explorer window a New User View Opens the New User View dialog box that lets you create a new user view This command is available only when the root icon Net Inspector Server is selected or when nothing is selected in the Explorer window LO 41 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual 3 3 Map Overview Window Net Inspector Client Main Window 3 3 1 Purpose The Map Overview window is a floating window that displays a graphical overview of the content of the map currently selected in the Maps window Graphics view and indicates what portion of the map is displayed in the Maps window This principle enables better orientation and easier map navigation 3 3 2 Opening To display or hide the Map Overview window use the View Map Overview toggle command The Map Overview window is a floating window that can be resized and repositioned independently of the Net Inspector Client main window 3 3 3 Description The Map Overview window graphically displays the entire content of the map that is currently displayed in the Maps window Graphics view If the Map Overview window is resized its content is also automatically resized reduced or enlarged
265. object Apply button Applies all modifications Cancel button Rejects all modifications Resolve Device Address button Forces resolving the device name to IP address at user request This is useful in environments with dynamic IP addresses in order to manually refresh the device IP address in Net Inspector e g after it has been changed by a DHCP server Note that this function is executed automatically anytime the monitoring of an object is re enabled 65 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Properties Window Category drop down list Displays the currently selected view e g General Settings System and lets you switch between views in the Properties window For more information on views categories of parameters see the Description section Ping button Opens the Ping and Traceroute Console window and queries the managed object by means of ICMP Echo request s The ping results are displayed in the Ping and Traceroute Console window MIB Browser button Opens the MIB Browser window and queries the managed object by means of an SNMP GetNext request The results are displayed in the Results panel of the MIB Browser window Status bar The status bar is displayed at the bottom of the Properties window and provides information about the following object properties from left to right a The icon and name of the managed object a The node ID of the managed object a The object ID of th
266. og Box TCP connect round trip time checkbox and two input lines If this checkbox is checked the IP SLA TCP connect round trip time threshold is enabled Enter the TCP connect round trip time threshold values in ms into the accompanying input lines This way Net Inspector will trigger an alarm when the TCP connect round trip time exceeds the configured value for raising the alarm first input line and clear the alarm when the round trip time falls below the clear alarm threshold value second input line HTTP round trip time checkbox and two input lines If this checkbox is checked the IP SLA HTTP round trip time threshold is enabled Enter the HTTP round trip time threshold values in ms into the accompanying input lines This way Net Inspector will trigger an alarm when the HTTP round trip time exceeds the configured value for raising the alarm first input line and clear the alarm when the round trip time falls below the clear alarm threshold value second input line DNS round trip time checkbox and two input lines If this checkbox is checked the IP SLA DNS round trip time threshold is enabled Enter the DNS round trip time threshold values in ms into the accompanying input lines This way Net Inspector will trigger an alarm when the DNS round trip time exceeds the configured value for raising the alarm first input line and clear the alarm when the round trip time falls below the clear alarm threshold value second
267. on each managed object in the Services view of the device Properties window SNMP checkbox If this checkbox is checked the SNMP polling is enabled The checkboxes below determine what parameters besides the basic system information will be monitored via SNMP e g network interfaces resources etc If any custom user configured polling group is configured and applied it will appear in this list Override ping OID checkbox input line and drop down list If this checkbox is checked the default SNMP Ping parameters can be overridden SNMP Ping operation is used to monitor the status availability of the SNMP agent on the managed device By default this is achieved by periodically querying it with SNMP GetNext requests containing the 0 0 OID this mechanism retrieves the value of the first accessible OID that lexicographically follows the OID of 0 0 If you would like some other OID to be queried or use the SNMP Get operation instead check the Override ping OID checkbox and enter the desired OID into the OID input line and select the SNMP operation GetNext or Get to be used for retrieving this OID from the Operation drop down list Network interfaces checkbox and input line If this checkbox is checked the network interfaces on the managed object will be monitored via SNMP In the accompanying Poll every input line enter the polling interval in seconds for monitoring network interface statistics Furthermore you c
268. on the list more detailed statistics for the selected service is displayed service availability and round trip time RTT NetFlow tab When you click this tab the Performance Manager NetFlow page is displayed The NetFlow page displays a list of all configured NetFlow sFlow source devices if any and the TopN NetFlow traffic reports for all NetFlow sources By expanding and clicking the individual subentries in the Top N reports more detailed statistics for the selected item e g device interface conversation application etc is shown IP SLA tab When you click this tab the Performance Manager IP SLA page is displayed The IP SLA page displays the lists of IP SLA categories e g HTTP DNS Jitter VoIP etc and operations within categories Source gt destination items as well as the current IP SLA measurements e g round trip time RTT latency packet loss etc L 160 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Performance Manager Home Page Window Reports tab When you click this tab the Performance Manager Report page is displayed In the Reports page you can view the predefined time reports configure custom report pages and export predefined and custom report pages to PDF and CSV format Examples of custom reports are Top10 reports reports of monitored objects with problems etc Homepage By default the user s homepage displays the Welcome page and a list of all devices in the system showing thei
269. on tree with several entries Depending on the entry selected in the navigation tree different panel is displayed in the right section of the Client Preferences dialog box In addition the following buttons are displayed at the bottom of the Client Preferences dialog box OK button Applies all changes and closes the dialog box Apply button Applies all changes and leaves the dialog box open Cancel button Discards all changes and closes the dialog box General Panel Look amp Fell Select button Opens a dialog box which lets you select the visual appearance look amp feel of the Net Inspector Client GUI Language drop down list Displays and lets you select the language for displaying the GUI texts 9 215 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Client Preferences Dialog Box Show memory usage in status bar checkbox If this checkbox is checked the main window status bar displays the amount of memory used and the total amount of memory available to the Net Inspector Client Show only one object properties window checkbox If this checkbox is checked only one object Properties window can be open at a time Otherwise more than one Properties window can be displayed at the same time each showing properties of a different object Show server localization code page in status bar checkbox If this checkbox is checked the main window status bar indicates the code page the Net Inspector Server which the
270. ond input line 9 115 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Server Settings Dialog Box Cisco MOS checkbox and two input lines If this checkbox is checked the mean opinion score MOS threshold is enabled The estimated mean opinion score MOS is a numerical indication of the perceived quality of sound after compression and transmission Cisco routers with enabled VoIP UDP jitter IP SLAs will calculate and express the estimated MOS value as a number in the range of 1 to 5 where 1 is the lowest audio quality and 5 is the highest quality A MOS value of zero indicates that MOS data is not available Enter the MOS threshold values into the accompanying input lines This way Net Inspector will trigger an alarm when the MOS as measured by the IP SLAs falls bellow the trigger alarm threshold value first input line and clear the alarm when it raises again above the clear alarm threshold value second input line OK button Applies all changes and closes the dialog box Cancel button Discards all changes and closes the dialog box 8 3 2 SNMP Tab The SNMP tab is used for managing SNMP access profiles It provides the following controls SNMP list Displays a list of the existing SNMP access profiles Add button Opens the New SNMP Access Profile dialog box which lets you create and configure anew SNMP access profile Edit button Opens the Edit SNMP Access Profile dialog box which lets you view and modi
271. op down list Here you can decide between Line or Area graph types This option appears only if you have selected the Graph option in the View type drop down list Graph color input line color choosing dialog Here you can choose a color for the graph line or area You can choose via a dialog or you can write the HTML color code in the input line This option appears only if you have selected the Graph option in the View type drop down list Records per page input line and checkbox Enter the number of records per page or check the checkbox if you do not want a limit This option appears only if you have selected the Data table option in the View type drop down list Device drop down list or multiple choices list Here you can select for which device s you want the data in the report Interface drop down list Pick the interface you want monitored L 166 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Performance Manager Home Page Window MIN Severity drop down list This drop down list lets you choose the minimal severity level reported in this report You can choose between a Informational a Warning a Minor a Major a Critical TopN group drop down list Here you can select from which statistics you want to view the top5 report You have the following choices a Cisco statistics a Host resources statistics a Network interfaces traffic errors and status statistics TopN statistics drop down list Depen
272. opagation view lets you view and configure propagation settings for the selected map It provides the following controls Map input line Displays the name of the map for which the propagation settings are displayed Children list Displays all objects and submaps on the selected map and lets you configure whether their status and alarms should be propagated up to the parent map or not The Children list contains the following columns Name Displays the name of the managed object or the submap Propagation Displays the propagation state of the object or the submap propagating or not propagating Propagate button Enables the alarm and status propagation for the object or submap selected in the Children list Don t Propagate button Disables the alarm and status propagation for the object or submap selected in the Children list LO 54 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Properties Window 5 PROPERTIES WINDOW 5 1 Purpose The Properties window is used for viewing various information about the selected managed object like the general information about the managed object alarms associated with the object and settings used for polling the managed object This window displays also the information collected through SNMP polling i e the status and utilization of all network interfaces on the managed object and the system resources utilization CPU load memory usage storage capacity utilizatio
273. or AUTH LOGIN authentication at SMTP server o Password The password for AUTH LOGIN authentication at SMTP server o TLS checkbox If this checkbox is checked the TLS transport protocol is used for securing the communication with the E SMTP server You should enable this option only if the E SMTP server specified in the Server input line above supports it Note If this option is disabled Linux version please refer to the TROUBLE _SHOOTING TXT document that installs with the software for instructions on how to enable it Merging frame Merge maximum X events within time interval of Y s Specifies up to how many events X triggered within a specified interval Y will be included into one e mail message This option can be useful for reducing the number of e mail messages sent Delay e mailing active alarms delay is between 1 and 2 merge intervals If this option is enabled Net Inspector Server checks the age of every alarm raising event and e mails it only if it is older than the merge interval Y set above and if no corresponding clear event exists meaning the alarm is still active If the alarm raising event is younger than the merge interval Y it will be e mailed in the next merge interval If the corresponding event that clears the alarm is triggered in the meanwhile both raise and clear events are ignored not e mailed This option is used for e mailing alarms that are active for at least a specific amount of tim
274. or Client from the Server and closes all windows in the Client main window If the workspace has been modified and not saved yet the Save Maps dialog box appears which lets you save the layout of modified user views or cancel the modifications This command is available only when the root Net Inspector Server icon is selected or when nothing is selected in the Explorer window a Open This command is available only when a user view or a submap icon is selected in the Explorer window When a submap or the active user view icon is selected this command creates a new tab in the Maps window and displays the contents of the selected submap or the selected user view s top level objects in it If an inactive user view icon is selected such user views are represented with grayed out icons this command opens activates the selected user view a Close Closes deactivates the selected user view This command is available only in the design mode a Properties Opens the Sub map Properties Window of the selected sub map or user view This command is available only when a sub map or a user view icon is selected in the Explorer window a Enable Enables all action and managed objects in the given map branch i e the selected map and its submaps This command is available only when a sub map or an active user view icon is selected in the Explorer window a Disable Disables all action and managed objects in the given map branch i e the sele
275. orizontally resize the pinned tooltip window The content of the pinned tooltip window is automatically refreshed when new information is available Name Name of the managed object device Object ID The unique Object ID of the managed object Address The IP address or the host name of the managed object Type and class Displays the type and class of the managed object Interfaces section Name The name and the current status of the network interface as retrieved from the SNMP agent on the managed object The interface status can be either up 0 down Y disabled BY or not present 0 LO 29 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Net Inspector Client Main Window IP address The IP address assigned to the network interface if any Status The interface status Possible values are up down disabled or not present In Utilization The last retrieved inbound utilization rate of the interface Out Utilization The last retrieved outbound utilization rate of the interface CPU section Number of cores Total number of CPU cores Usage The last retrieved average CPU usage in Storage section Name The name of the storage unit including disk units and memory Type Type of the storage unit disk physical memory virtual memory Used size The last retrieved storage unit used capacity in Free size The last retrieved storage unit free capacity in Active alarms section Displays th
276. ormance Statistics window is a Java based web browser used for viewing the performance web page for the device selected in Net Inspector The device performance web page is generated by the Performance Manager polling engine that polls that device in MG SOFT Net Inspector WorkGroup Enterprise and Carrier Edition The device performance web pages include the following statistics current data and history device response time and packet loss rate and for SNMP devices depending on type also network interface statistics resources utilization statistics running processes statistics IP SLA statistics custom statistics etc 10 2 Opening To open the Performance Statistics window for the specific device right click the respective managed object in the Maps Window and select Show Performance Statistics from the pop up menu that appears Alternatively select the managed object device you want in the Maps Window and click the Show Performance Statistics button in the Toolbar 10 3 Description The Performance Statistics window lets you view and browse the performance web page for the selected device It displays the system information response times average min max and packet loss rate for the selected device as well as the status and utilization rates of all monitored network interfaces on that device For devices implementing the HOST RESOURCES MIB module and for Cisco devices this page displays also the Memory amp Processor
277. oses the Windows dialog box 228 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Menus 26 MENUS The menu bar displayed directly below the Net Inspector Client title bar contains the following program menus o File o Edit o View o Event o Map a Tools o Window a Help 26 1 File Menu Connect Ctrl Shift N Opens the Connect to Net Inspector Server dialog box enabling you to configure parameters for a connecting and logging on to Net Inspector Server Disconnect Disconnects Net Inspector Client from the Server and closes all windows in the Client main window H the workspace has been modified and not saved yet the Save Maps dialog box appears which lets you save modified user views or reject the modifications Reconnect Ctrl Shift R Re establishes the last used connection between Net Inspector Client and Server Switch to Design Mode Switches Net Inspector Client into the Design mode of operation Switch to Alarm Mode Switches Net Inspector Client into the normal mode This menu option is available if you are connected to the Net Inspector Server in the Design mode Close Cirl F4 Closes the currently active tab displayed in the Maps window Close All Ctrl Shift F4 Closes all tabs displayed in the Maps window Close Other Tabs Closes all inactive tabs all but currently active selected Save Ctrl S Saves the layout of the currently active map tab displayed in the Maps window 229 MG
278. ou enter or edit comment for the selected alarms Comments are displayed in the Comment column a Akcnowledge Acknowledges the selected alarms By acknowledging alarms users declare that they are aware of the alarms Acknowledged alarms are not shown in the alarm balloons Events cannot be acknowledged unacknowledged a Unacknowledge Unacknowledges the selected alarms reverses the Acknowledge operation a Manually Clear Manually clears the selected alarms Note that Net Inspector system alarms i e alarms that have the Message ID value in the range of 10000 15000 cannot be manually cleared Events cannot be manually cleared uncleared a Manually Unclear Unclears the selected alarms reverses the Manually Clear operation a Remove Cleared Alarms Removes all cleared alarms from the currently active tab of the Events window a Find Events Opens the Find Events dialog box which lets you search for alarms and events o Export Opens the Export Events dialog box which lets you export alarms currently displayed in the General view of the Properties window to a HTML or CSV comma separated value file format The Export Events dialog box closely resembles the EN 84 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Action Object Properties Windows operating system s standard Save As dialog box Note that only information provided by the columns which are displayed will be exported o Select All Ctrl A Selects all dis
279. ow Colors frame Text color drop down list and Custom button The Text color drop down list displays the text color assigned to the selected severity level To change the color select another color from the Text color drop down list or click the Custom button and select a custom color from the Select Color dialog box that appears If you select the Automatic entry from the Text color drop down list the default system font color will be used These colors are used for displaying texts in tables that show events and or alarms e g Events window if Use Colors option is enabled Maps window Details view Alarms and New Alarms columns Device Panel dialog box Alarms and New Alarms columns Properties window General view Active alarms list etc as well as in alarm balloons and rectangles shown in the Maps window Graphics view Background color drop down list and Custom button The Background color drop down list displays the background color assigned to the selected severity level To change the color select another color from the Background color drop down list or click the Custom button and select a custom color from the Select Color dialog box that appears If you select the Automatic entry from the Background color drop down list the system background color will be used 221 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual User Preferences Dialog Box These settings are used for displaying the back
280. owser window after performing SNMP Walk operation on the system subtree Walking system on sasor2 Resolving sasor2 sysDescr 0 OCTET STRING Hardware x86 Family 15 Model 2 Stepping 9 AT AT COMPAT sysObjectID O rees mgSoft sysUpTime 0 TimeTicks 5 58 18 10 sysContact 0 OCTET STRING sasor mg soft si sysName 0 OCTET STRING SasoR sysLocation 0 OCTET STRING MG SOFT HQ Maribor Slovenia sysServices 0 Gauge32 76 Finished 214 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Client Preferences Dialog Box 22 CLIENT PREFERENCES DIALOG BOX 22 1 Purpose The Client Preferences dialog box is used for setting the client specific preferences i e the Client look and feel and certain aspects of its behavior These settings are stored on the computer where Net Inspector Client software is installed and are common to all users of the given copy of Net Inspector Client These settings are independent of the Net Inspector Server the Client connects to For example if you enable the option to automatically re establish a broken connection with the Server this setting will apply irrespective of the user that currently uses that copy of Net Inspector Client software and regardless of the Net Inspector Server the Client is connected to 22 2 Opening To open the Client Preferences dialog box use the Tools Client Preferences command 22 3 Description The left section of the Client Preferences dialog box contains a navigati
281. p this field reflects the color of the most severe new alarm that exists on the objects within the given map and all its submaps if propagation is not disabled State Displays a graphic symbol circle whose color indicates the current operability state of the SNMP agent on the managed object this property is shown only for the managed objects The following operability states and colors are used operability state color of the graphic symbol Disabled grey Enabled green Unavailable red Testing blue Type Displays the type of the object e g IP etc or the Submap for maps Propagation Displays whether the status and alarms associated with the object or map are propagated upward to its parent map s or not Description Displays and lets you edit a short description of the object For managed objects Net Inspector discovery operation sets this value to the value of the sysDescr 0 object instance returned by the SNMP agent on the managed object Object ID Displays the unique identification code of the object within the Net Inspector system This identification code consists of two integers separated by a dot e g 1 2 The first integer is the Net Inspector configuration number while the second integer uniquely identifies the object within the given configuration Node ID Displays the identification number that has been assigned to the object by the user according to the user s classification system
282. pector Reference Manual Server Settings Dialog Box Conditions panel The Conditions panel displays and lets you re configure existing filter conditions and logical operators connecting them Example of the Conditions panel contents Ep active logical operator first level y inactive logical operator second level Y Source hpjdi condition yy active logical operator second level e Severity Critical Severity Major two conditions combined with logical OR ee Simple mode is enabled Simple i Advanced Expression equivalent to the filter displayed above would be Source hpjd1 AND Severity Critical OR Severity Major Meaning Let through all events triggered by hpdj object whose severity levels are either Critical or Major Simple and Advanced Mode Conditions panel contains two tabs providing two modes of operation Simple and Advanced The Simple mode which is enabled by default lets you create filters in a straightforward manner you only add filter conditions to the Conditions panel and the program automatically groups conditions of the same type and connects them with logical OR operator while conditions of a different type are connected with logical AND operator For example if you add two conditions of the same type eg severity critical and severity major they will be combined with the logical OR operator meaning that the filter will let trou
283. played alarms a Table Options cascading menu a Keep Cleared Alarms toggle menu option If this option is checked alarms that are cleared automatically by Net Inspector remain listed in the current view otherwise they automatically disappear from the current list of alarms when cleared a Keep Manually Cleared Alarms toggle menu option If this option is checked alarms that are manually cleared by the user remain listed in the current view otherwise they automatically disappear from the current list of alarms when cleared Settings View The Settings view contains the following controls Command frame Execute input line Lets you specify the system command or the full path to the program or script e g Engine bin sendtrap sh that will be executed by Net Inspector Server when an event is triggered You can use the Browse button next to this input line to select the executable file from the disk Note that the file must be stored on the computer running Net Inspector Server in the Engine folder or its subfolders Arguments input line Lets you specify program switches and parameters to be appended to the command specified above To enable passing desired details about Net Inspector events to the invoked program use the reserved words All reserved words start with the character The reserved words are replaced with the event attributes when the command is executed e g the SSEVERITY
284. ply the changes and exit the edit mode This button is disabled if a built in message is selected Remove button Deletes the selected line message LO 138 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Server Settings Dialog Box Apply button Applies the changes in the edited line and exits the edit mode Cancel button Discards all changes in the edited line and exits the edit mode 8 7 2 Cause Tab This tab lets you view the list of the built in probable causes and their ID values It also lets you add edit and remove user defined causes and corresponding IDs The Cause tab provides the following controls Cause List Displays the existing event alarm probable causes Each cause is represented by one line Lines containing the built in cause values have grey background color indicating that they cannot be edited Lines containing the user defined causes have white background color indicating that they can be edited The Cause list contains the following columns ID Displays the unique identification number ID of the cause User defined causes have cause ID value in range 10000 20000 Cause Displays the probable cause text Buttons Add button Adds a new line to the Cause list and puts the line in edit mode so it can be configured by entering the ID and cause text values into corresponding input lines ID Cause After configuring the cause attributes click the Apply button to apply the changes an
285. profile is used SNMP profile The name of the SNMP access profile that will be used for polling the managed object via SNMP If this attribute is absent in the CSV file the default SNMP profile is used Polling engine The name of the polling engine that will be used for polling the managed object If this attribute is absent in the CSV file the Built in polling engine is used Add button Adds a new managed object new line to the Devices list Enter the IP address and the name properties of the managed object and optionally edit its other attributes Remove button Deletes the selected managed object from the Devices list Open File button Displays the Import dialog box that lest you select an additional CSV text file for import Modify Selected button Opens the Settings dialog box that lets you select the polling profile SNMP profile and the polling engine for multiple selected objects Poll imported devices checkbox If this checkbox is checked Net Inspector will start immediately monitoring the newly imported devices LJ 36 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Net Inspector Client Main Window Import button Imports the managed objects devices into Net Inspector and adds their icons to the currently displayed map in the Maps window Imported objects appear also in the Device Panel dialog box Close button Discards all changes and closes the dialog box 3 1 11 Adding Objects to Maps
286. put line Displays a short description of the system object Active alarms frame Displays a summary and a list of active alarms associated with the object Summary displays the total number of active alarms and the number of active alarms broken down by severity levels The list of alarms is displayed in the same manner as in the Events window The Event system object triggers the following events and alarms MessagelD Severity Message 10210 Critical Failed to connect to event storage database 10211 Critical Failed to initialize event storage database 10212 Critical Failed to access event storage database 10215 Critical Failed to connect to event storage database for event queries 10216 Critical Failed to initialize event storage database for event queries 10217 Critical Failed to access event storage database for event queries 10220 Critical Failed to connect to event storage database for event maintenance 10221 Critical Failed to initialize event storage database for event maintenance 10222 Critical Failed to access event storage database for event maintenance Pop Up Menu To display the pop menu right click one or more alarms in the list of active alarms The pop up menu contains the following commands a Details Opens the Event Details window which displays details of the selected alarm This window display the same information as the Event Details sub window a Add Comment Opens the Add Comment dialog box that lets you ent
287. r across the Maps window Release the mouse button when the size of the ellipse circle matches your preferences LA 23 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Net Inspector Client Main Window Lets you add a new or edit an existing text in the Maps window To add a text first click this button then click within the Maps window at the point where the text should start This opens the Text Editor dialog box Enter the text into the Text Editor dialog box adjust the font type and size to meet your preferences and click the OK button to close the dialog and display the entered text in the Maps window To edit an existing text click this button and then click the text to be edited in the Maps window to open the text in the Text Editor dialog box where you can edit it Note If you select a special font type e g a Cyrillic font that is not available on other computers running Net Inspector Client the added text might not be visible when connecting to Net Inspector Server from other computers Lets you add an image to the Maps window To add an image first click this button then click within the Maps window to select a point for the upper left corner of the image This opens the Select Image dialog box that lets you choose a bitmap image file JPG BMP or PNG format to be inserted Note that the image file must be stored on the computer running Net Inspector Server in the Engine folder or its subfolders S
288. r descriptions annotated to the managed object Objects can be searched by the value of their tags Location Displays the physical location of the managed object Net Inspector discovery operation sets this value to the value of the sysLocation 0 object instance returned by the SNMP agent Vendor Displays the managed object vendor name Net Inspector discovery operation sets this value to the name of the enterprise responsible for the OID namespace returned by the sysObjectID 0 object instance The enterprise names displayed are taken from the list of private numbers as registered with IANA and stored on the Net Inspector Server Engine data nienterprise txt OS The operating system running on the managed object URL The URL uniform resource locator address e g which provides additional information about the managed object e g http www iskratel si Close button Closes the Device Panel dialog box 19 4 Pop Up Menu SI Locate in Active User View Finds the selected object and displays it in the Maps window Show All User View References Shows the References panel in the right section of the Device Panel dialog box which displays a hierarchical tree structure of user views and sub maps that include the selected object s The root object in the References panel is the selected object its child items are the user views that contain this object and the child items of user views are the map branches that contain
289. r status Each Performance Manager user can customize his her own homepage to contain one or more custom reports graphs tables external web pages included as HTTP frames and or a map on which a user can drag and drop icons of devices and monitor their status User homepages are configured in the same manner as custom report pages Export button Exports the homepage report to a PDF document It can be accessed in the Report page Configure button Lets you configure the homepage User homepages are configured in the same manner as custom Report pages Devices page The Devices page displays all monitored devices included in the currently active user view the current status of devices assigned polling engine and the basic device alarm information the number of alarms and severity of the most critical alarm associated with the device Alarms page The Alarms page displays all active open alarms New alarms will be automatically added to the Alarms list as they occur after web page refresh and the existing alarms will disappear from the list after web page refresh when they are cleared Note 1 Alarms are messages that indicate faults or conditions that could lead to faults on managed devices An alarm can be active or cleared An alarm is active as long as the condition that triggered it is present e g when a managed device does not respond to queries the Device is down alarm is raised and becomes active
290. r the user account Retype input line Lets you confirm the password by re entering it User must change password at login checkbox If this checkbox is checked the user will be prompted to change his her password the next time he she logs on to Net Inspector Server Group input line Lets you enter edit the user group the given user account belongs to Access radio buttons Lets you select the access rights for the given user administrator operator guest Description input line Lets you enter edit the user account description OK button Applies the changes and closes the dialog box Cancel button Discards all changes and closes the dialog box L 106 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Server Settings Dialog Box 8 2 2 Edit User Dialog Box The Edit User dialog box is used for editing an existing user account To open this dialog box select an item in the list of user accounts in the Users panel of the Server Settings dialog box and click the Edit User button This dialog box provides the following controls Username input line Displays the name for the user account Encryption drop down list Displays the password encryption method i e MD5 or None User must change password at login checkbox Lets you check or uncheck the checkbox If the checkbox is checked the user will be prompted to change his her password the next time he she logs on to Net Inspector Server Group input lin
291. rators are in effect A logical operator is active if it has at least two directly or indirectly subordinated conditions in the hierarchical filter tree LU 180 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Find Events Dialog Box Buttons a Add Adds the condition from the New condition toolbar to the Conditions panel In Advanced mode the condition is added to the selected branch in the filter tree a Edit Lets you edit the selected condition or operator Operators can be modified only in Advanced mode a Remove Removes the selected condition or operator and all its child objects from the Conditions panel a AND Adds the logical AND operator to the selected filter branch This button is enabled only in Advanced mode o OR Adds the logical OR operator to the selected filter branch This button is enabled only in Advanced mode a Import Opens the Import dialog box which lets you select a previously saved filter and import it into Find Events dialog box Conditions panel Note that only the filter conditions can be imported the search time frame is never saved or imported along with the filter The Import dialog box lets you select the filter either from the My filters repository which contains all previously saved display and search filters from the Action filters repository which contains all action filters available in the Manage Action Filters dialog box or from a file filters that have been saved to a fil
292. rd without starting the discovery operation Welcome Screen Step 0 This screen introduces you to the Network Discovery Wizard and describes its steps LO 184 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Network Discovery Wizard Specify SNMP Profile s Step 1 In the first step of the Network Discovery wizard you can manage and select the SNMP access profiles that will be used for discovering the network devices Please note that the SNMP access profile with which a device has been discovered is automatically assigned to that device so Net Inspector Server will use it to poll that device SNMP profiles list Lists available SNMP access profiles Note that the order in which the enabled profiles are listed is important First the top listed profile will be used for discovering the network then the second profile from the top will be used etc To move a profile up or down on the list select it and click the Up or Down button next to this list respectively The order of the SNMP access profiles also determines which profiles will be assigned to discovered devices and affects the duration of the discovery operation if a device can be successfully queried using the first profile on the list this profile will be assigned to the managed object and the remaining profiles won t be used for discovering that device To not use a specific SNMP profile in discovery uncheck the Use checkbox in front of its name Each SNMP profil
293. rder for a MIB module to appear on the list of available modules it must be properly registered on the computer that runs Net Inspector Server Net Inspector comes with over 200 standard MIB modules that are registered already at the time of installing the software The package includes also MG SOFT MIB Compiler application that lets you compile private MIB modules provided by the vendors of the network equipment You can load MIB modules into Net Inspector in order to enable managing network nodes in a user friendly way e g to view the relevant MIB objects in the MIB tree shown in the MIB Browser window to display the names and certain values of retrieved SNMP variables in the MIB Browser window to identify received SNMP Trap and Inform notifications by their names etc To compile additional MIB modules and load them in Net Inspector proceed as follows 1 Use the bundled MG SOFT MIB Compiler on the PC that runs Net Inspector Server to compile additional MIB module s 2 Use MG SOFT MIB Compiler to save the compiled MIB module s to smidb file format in the default location which is a On Windows Vista Windows Server 2008 and Windows 7 lt drive gt ProgramData MG SOFT SMI Modules MIB Modules SMIDB NOTE ProgramData is a hidden folder b On Windows XP Windows Server 2003 lt drive gt Documents and Settings All Users Application DatalMG SOFT SMI Modules MIB Modules SMIDB NOTE Application Data is a hidden fo
294. represents e g event storage subsystem is enabled and its functioning is being monitored by Net Inspector This checkbox is always unchecked for maps Name Displays the symbol and name of the object or map Status Displays the status of the object e g Normal In case of a map this field displays the most critical status of the object s included in the given map and all its submaps if propagation is not disabled Alarms Displays the total number of active alarms on the object or the total number of active alarms on objects in the map in case of a map This field also reflects the color of the most severe active alarm that currently exists on the object according to the alarm severity colors configured in the User Preferences dialog box Colors panel In case of a map this field reflects the color of the most severe alarm that exists on the objects within the given map and all its submaps if propagation is not disabled LO 14 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Net Inspector Client Main Window New Alarms Displays the number of new alarms on the object or the number of new alarms on all objects in the map in case of a map New alarms are active alarms which are not acknowledged The New Alarms field also reflects the color of the most severe new alarm that currently exists on the object according to the alarm severity colors configured in the User Preferences dialog box Colors panel In case of a ma
295. ritical or Major ha two conditions combined with logical OR Simple and Advanced Mode Conditions panel contains two tabs providing two modes of operation Simple and Advanced The Simple mode which is enabled by default lets you create a search filter in a straightforward manner you only add search conditions to the Conditions panel and the program automatically groups conditions of the same type and connects them with logical OR operator while conditions of a different type are connected with logical AND operator For example if you add two conditions of the same type eg severity critical and severity major they will be connected with logical OR meaning that the combined criteria will find alarms events that satisfy either the first or the second condition i e it will find all critical alarms and all major alarms If you on the other hand add two conditions of different types e g severity critical and message device is down they are connected with logical AND meaning that only those alarms events that satisfy both conditions at the same time will be found The Simple mode does not let you manipulate logical operators it only lets you configure and add conditions to the Conditions panel This mode also does not allow connecting different types of conditions with the logical OR operator The Advanced mode which can be enabled by clicking the Advanced tab lets you create more co
296. rom 161 58 185 177 time 127ms TTL 245 3 42 30 PM Reply from 161 58 185 177 time 127ms TTL 245 3 42 35 PM Reply from 161 58 185 177 time 129ms TTL 245 Ping statistics for 161 58 185 177 Packets Sent 5 Recieved 5 Lost 0 0 loss Approximate round trip times in mili seconds Minimum 127ms Maximum 129ms Average 127ms Finished 208 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual MIB Browser Window 21 MIB BROWSER WINDOW 21 1 Purpose The MIB Browser window is used for exploring the graphical MIB tree and querying devices on the network using the SNMP protocol 21 2 Opening The MIB Browser window can be opened in several ways a By selecting Tools MIB Browser command a By clicking the MIB Browser toolbar button a By selecting the Tools MIB Browser pop up command in the Maps window or in the Device Panel dialog box 21 3 Description The MIB Browser window is used for navigating the graphical MIB tree and browsing SNMP agents on remote managed devices i e retrieving the values of SNMP variables by means of SNMP Get SNMP GetNext and Walk operations It also lets you view the MIB node properties search for nodes and access the MIB Modules window All SNMP queries are performed by the Net Inspector Server The MIB Browser window contains the address drop down list a toolbar SNMP settings toolbar and two vertically divided panels MIB tree and Results The MIB tree panel on
297. rom the menu 234 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Menus 26 8 Help Menu MG SOFT on the WEB Contains sub menus with links to the MG SOFT web site MG SOFT Home Page Opens the MG SOFT home web page Net Inspector Home Page Opens the Net Inspector home web page Products Page Opens the MG SOFT Products web page Secure Online Orders Opens the MG SOFT ordering web page Subscribe to Mailing List Opens the Mailing List Subscription form web page Download Software Details Opens the MG SOFT download web page Evaluation License Key Request Opens the 30 day Evaluation License Key Request web page Other Products Displays a cascading menu containing links to web pages related to other MG SOFT products Getting Started Guide Opens the Getting Started Guide in the system default PDF viewer application Reference Manual Opens the Reference Manual in the system default PDF viewer application Performance Manager User Manual Opens the Performance Manager User Manual in the system default PDF viewer Installation and Configuration Guide Opens the Installation and Configuration Guide in the system default PDF viewer Support Automatically collects the relevant support information and displays it in the Support Information window that lets you copy or save the information to a text file to be attached to your support request Please include this information into your support request e mail and provide a deta
298. rom the Value drop down list e g Workstation a Location If this condition type is selected you can enter the object location into the Value input line e g MG SOFT Headquarters a Vendor If this condition type is selected you can enter the device vendor into the Value input line e g MG SOFT a Vendor OID If this condition type is selected you can enter the device vendor OID into the Value input line e g 1 3 6 1 4 1 1315 LO 199 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Manage Discovery Filters Dialog Box Operator Lets you select the operator e g is is not or contains Available operators depend on the type of condition selected Value Lets you select or enter the condition value Available and valid values depend on the type of condition selected Conditions panel The Conditions panel displays and lets you re configure existing filter conditions and logical operators connecting them Example of the Conditions panel contents EN active logical operator 1 level IP Range is from 192 168 2 1 to Wed two conditions combined with Class is not Workstation logical AND operator Advanced mode is enabled Simple Advanced Simple and Advanced Mode Conditions panel contains two tabs providing two modes of operation Simple and Advanced For more information about Simple and Advanced modes please consult the Create Filter dia
299. roperties window can be opened by double clicking the command object icon in the Maps window or by right clicking the command object and selecting the Properties pop up command 6 3 3 Description A command object represents a Net Inspector mechanism that runs a specific command program or script and optionally passes desired event attributes as command line arguments to it The command object itself triggers events and alarms if the command execution fails for some reason In addition the status of the command object changes if any critical faults in command execution process occur As other action objects Command objects function globally meaning that they run commands not only when events on the objects included in the currently active user view occur but also when events on any other object registered with Net Inspector occur By configuring and applying action filters one can restrict the command execution functionality of a command object in various ways For example you can setup a filter that will allow running commands only for events associated with particular objects or only for events of a particular severity level etc Action filters are configured in the Manage Action Filters dialog box and applied in the Filters view of the Command Properties window The Command Properties window contains several views displaying different categories of parameters e g General Settings Users can switch between the views by select
300. rpose It is used for creating filters for displaying specific active alarms in the Events window Filtered list of alarm is dynamic e new alarms appear on the list and cleared alarms disappear from the list by default over time as opposed to the static list of alarms events displayed by the Find Events operation 12 2 Opening To open the Create Filter dialog box select the Event Create Filter command 12 3 Description The Create Filter dialog box lets you create a display filter that will show only those active alarms that match the filter conditions Filtered alarms are displayed in a separate tab in the Events window The list of filtered alarms dynamically changes over time i e new alarms that match the filter criteria are added to the list when they are triggered and by default automatically cleared alarms disappear from the list while manually cleared alarms stay on the list The Create Filter dialog box contains a toolbar that lets you create filter conditions and add them to the filter one by one while the central section of the dialog box Conditions panel displays the entire filter consisting of filter conditions and relations between them The Conditions panel displays a filter in form of a hierarchical tree where the filter conditions are connected with logical operators AND OR and can be grouped into branches Filter conditions can be specified by using the following controls in the Create Filter di
301. s Enable button Activates the action operation SMS sending and starts monitoring its functioning Disable button Dectivates the action operation SMS sending and stops monitoring its functioning Apply button Applies all modifications Cancel button Rejects all modifications Category drop down list Displays the currently selected view e g General Settings and lets you switch between the views For more information on views categories of parameters see the Description section Test button Tries to execute the action to check if everything is configured properly 31 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Action Object Properties Windows Status bar The status bar is displayed at the bottom of the SMS Properties window and provides information about the following object properties from left to right a The icon and name of the action object a The object ID of the action object a The current status of the action object La 82 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Action Object Properties Windows 6 3 Command Properties Window 6 3 1 Purpose The Command Properties window is used for viewing and configuring parameters of the given command object These parameters are used by Net Inspector Server to launch a command when events occur The Command Properties window also displays alarms triggered by the given command object itself 6 3 2 Opening The Command P
302. s alarms when there are problems with the Net Inspector notification receiving module e g if it cannot be initialized etc Furthermore the status of the SNMP notification object changes if any critical faults occur in the SNMP notification receiving subsystem The SNMP Notification Properties window contains two views that display different categories of parameters i e General and Settings view Users can switch between views by selecting the corresponding entries from the category drop down list displayed in upper section of the SNMP Notification Properties window General View The General view contains the following controls Name input line Displays the name of the system object Type input line Displays the type of the system object Description input line Displays a short description of the system object Active alarms frame Displays a summary and a list of active alarms associated with the object Summary displays the total number of active alarms and the number of active alarms broken down by severity levels The list of alarms is displayed in the same manner as in the Events window The SNMP Notification system object triggers the following events and alarms MessagelD Severity Message 10230 Critical Failed to initialize SNMP sub system to register SNMP notifications 10231 Major Failed to register port for SNMP notifications 10232 Critical Receiving SNMP notifications is temporarily disabled due
303. s all previously saved filters from the Action filters repository which contains all action filters available in the Manage Action Filters dialog box or from a file filters that have been saved to a file in previous versions of Net Inspector Remove Filter Opens the Remove Filter dialog box which lists all filters from the My filters repository and lets you delete them If a deleted filter is currently used in a tab in the Events window it remains in use until the Net Inspector Client is disconnected from the server or until the tab is manually removed from the Events window Save Filters Layout Lets you save all currently displayed display and action filter tabs in the Events window This command ensures that the existing display and action filter tabs are automatically restored next time the user opens the same user view This command is available only if a filter of find tab is selected in the Events window Export Filter to File Lets you save the filter that is applied in the currently selected tab of the Events window to a file stored on Net Inspector Client computer This command is disabled if no filter tab is selected in the Events window Import Filter from File Opens the Import Filter dialog box which closely resembles the standard Open dialog box which lets you select a previously saved filter file from disk and import it This creates a new tab in the Events window and applies the imported filter to it
304. s of available filters Manage Action Filters button Opens the Manage Action Filters dialog box Statistics View The Statistics view provides the following controls all input lines are read only Events processed input line Displays the total number of processed events since enabling the object or last resetting the statistics Successful input line Displays the number of successfully processed events since enabling the object or last resetting the statistics Last successful input line Displays the date and time of the last successfully processed event since enabling the object or last resetting the statistics Failed input line Displays the number of unsuccessfully processed events since enabling the object or last resetting the statistics Last failed input line Displays the date and time of the last unsuccessfully processed event since enabling the object or last resetting the statistics Reset statistics button Resets clears the statistics for the given action object Disabling and re enabling the object does not reset the statistics Buttons Enable button Activates the command execution operation and starts monitoring its functioning LU 86 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Action Object Properties Windows Disable button Dectivates the command execution operation and stops monitoring its functioning Apply button Applies all modifications Cancel button Rejec
305. s selected you can enter the desired date and time into the Value input line using the date and time formatting as configured in the user preferences e g Sep 12 2008 12 45 12 PM a Event state info Specifies who has changed the state of the alarm or event as last This can be either a user that has managed alarm e g acknowledged unacknowledged manually cleared uncleared or the Auto if the alarm has been automatically cleared by the system When specifying a user you can also specify the location IP address of the user who has managed the alarm in square brackets eg operator 192 168 10 120 If this condition type is selected you can enter an event state info into the Value input line e g admin 192 168 10 123 or Auto etc Operator Lets you select the operator e g is is not contains is greater or equal is smaller or equal etc Available operators depend on type of the condition selected Value Lets you enter or select the condition value Available and valid values depend on the type of the condition selected Conditions panel The Conditions panel displays and lets you re configure existing filter conditions and logical operators connecting them Example of the Conditions panel contents ANg active logical operator first level inactive logical operator second level Source hpjdi condition iy lt lt
306. s the value of a variable below which a certain percent of observations fall Therefore the 95 percentile line is a line under which you will find 95 of observations Trend line is a straight line connecting multiple points on a chart A trend line is used in technical analysis to determine the direction and strength of a trend An up trend line has a positive slope and connects at least two low points on a chart A down trend line has a negative slope and connects at least two high points on a chart The steepness of the slope of a trend line indicates the strength of the trend To view more detailed graphs and tables for any metric click on its graph chart in the device performance page System Information and Responsiveness The Response Time frame in the Performance Statistics window provides the basic information about the given device its status titlebar color and text and ping statistics This frame provides the general information about the device like its IP address hostname SysName SysLocation SysContact SysDescription etc The Sys data is obtained by querying the standard MIDI system group of objects via SNMP The information displayed will depend upon what information is available for that device in its MIB The section on the right displays the ping statistics history graphs i e device response times in milliseconds and the packet loss rate in The current response time and packet loss rate are presented also in g
307. sed Context engine ID The context engine ID value used for the notification reception Authentication protocol The SNMPv3 USM authentication protocol HMAC MD5 or HMAC SHA used for authenticating the notification Privacy protocol The SNMPv3 privacy protocol CBC DES or CFB AES 128 used for encrypting the notification Bindings Displays the variable bindings included into the received SNMP notification message 3 4 6 Filtering and Finding Alarms and Events The procedure of finding alarms and events is described in the Find Events dialog box section The procedure of creating a filter for displaying only those alarms that match the filter conditions is described in the Create Filter dialog box section LA 52 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Sub map Properties Window 4 SUB MAP PROPERTIES WINDOW 4 1 Purpose The Submap Properties window lets you view and configure the map name icon and map propagation settings 4 2 Opening To open the Submap Properties window select a sub map or an active user view icon in the Explorer window and choose the Properties pop up command Alternatively select a sub map icon Graphics view or row Details view in the Maps window and choose the Properties pop up command 4 3 Description The Submap Properties window provides the following controls Apply button Applies all modifications Cancel button Rejects all modifications Category drop down
308. selected filter branch o OR Adds the logical OR operator to the selected filter branch La 187 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Network Discovery Wizard Select Discovery Strategy Step 3 In the third step of the Network Discovery Wizard you need to select the desired strategy for discovering your network using the following controls Scan local subnet radio button Performs the discovery operation within the subnet which the Net Inspector Server computer is a member of Scan IP range s radio button Performs the discovery operation within the specified IP range s To add the desired IP ranges use the following controls Add button Opens the IP range dialog box where you can enter the desired range Start address input line Lets you enter the start address of the IP range End address input line Lets you enter the end address of the IP range Delete button Deletes the selected IP range Edit button Opens the IP range dialog box where you can edit the selected range Progressive network discovery radio button This type of discovery starts querying a single SNMP device and progressively discovers its neighbors and subnets etc Start SNMP agent address input line The IP address of the SNMP enabled device that will be scanned first in progressive discovery operation Scan entire subnets checkbox If this checkbox is checked and Net Inspector discovers a device that has a network
309. ser view s This section describes the Properties windows of system objects 7 1 Event Properties Window 7 1 1 Purpose The Event Properties window is used for viewing the configuration settings of the Net Inspector event storage subsystem and alarms associated with it 7 1 2 Opening The Event Properties window can be opened by double clicking the event system object icon in the Maps window or by right clicking the event object and selecting the Properties pop up command 7 1 3 Description The event object represents Net Inspector event storage subsystem module This object triggers alarms when there are problems with the Net Inspector event storage module e g if it cannot access the event storage database etc Furthermore the status of the event object changes if any critical faults associated with the event storage subsystem occur The Event Properties window contains two views that display different categories of parameters i e General and Settings view Users can switch between the views by selecting the corresponding entries from the category drop down list displayed in upper section of the Event Properties window General View The General view contains the following controls Name input line Displays the name of the system object LO 88 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual System Object Properties Windows Type input line Displays the type of the system object Description in
310. since enabling the object or last resetting the statistics LO 74 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Action Object Properties Windows Failed input line Displays the number of unsuccessfully processed events since enabling the object or last resetting the statistics Last failed input line Displays the date and time of the last unsuccessfully processed event since enabling the object or last resetting the statistics Reset statistics button Resets clears the statistics for the given action object Disabling and re enabling the object does not reset the statistics Buttons Enable button Activates the action operation e mail sending and starts monitoring its functioning Disable button Dectivates the action operation e mail sending and stops monitoring its functioning Apply button Applies all modifications Cancel button Rejects all modifications Category drop down list Displays the currently selected view e g General Settings and lets you switch between the views For more information on views categories of parameters see the Description section Test button Tries to execute the action to check if everything is configured properly Status bar The status bar is displayed at the bottom of the Mail Properties window and provides information about the following object properties from left to right a The icon and name of the action object a The object ID of th
311. st or click the Custom button and select a custom color from the Select Color dialog box that appears These settings are used for displaying the colors of graphic symbols associated with object statuses in tables that list them e g Device Panel dialog box Status column Maps window Details view Status column Explorer window map icon color 224 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual User Preferences Dialog Box Effects frame Bold checkbox Enables or disables displaying the texts for the selected status in tables that show object statuses in bold typeface Italic checkbox Enables or disables displaying the texts for the selected status in tables that show object statuses in talic typeface Strikethrough checkbox Enables or disables displaying the texts for the selected status in tables that show object statuses in strikethrough typeface Preview field This field is displayed at the bottom of the Colors panel and shows the preview of the settings in the selected view Here you can observe the results of your changes before applying them Formatting Panel Date Time format drop down list Lets you select the date and time format 225 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Print Dialog Box 24 PRINT DIALOG BOX 24 1 Purpose The Print dialog box is used for setting the printing options and for sending the selected content from Net Inspector Client to a printer 24 2 Opening
312. status bar It displays the performance web page for the selected device The device performance web page includes the following components depending on the device type Device Performance Toolbar It displays the name of the monitored device links to different sections of device performance page depending on device type and the following graph controls Time Period drop down list Lets you select the time window for graphs on the page By default graphs display the values of the monitored variables for the last 120 minutes To use a different time frame select a corresponding entry from the drop down list Example Current Date Time Tue 2010 10 05 14 45 00 Time Period Example Start Date Time Example End Date Time This hour Last 60 minutes Last hour Last 120 minutes Today Yesterday This week Last 7 days Last week Last business week Last 14 days This month Last 30 days Last month 2010 10 05 14 00 00 2010 10 05 13 45 00 2010 10 05 13 00 00 2010 10 05 12 45 00 2010 10 05 00 00 00 2010 10 04 00 00 00 Mon 2010 10 04 00 00 00 2010 09 29 00 00 00 Mon 2010 09 27 00 00 00 Mon 2010 09 27 00 00 00 2010 09 22 00 00 00 2010 10 01 00 00 00 2010 09 06 00 00 00 2010 09 01 00 00 00 2010 10 05 15 00 00 2010 10 05 14 45 00 2010 10 05 14 00 00 2010 10 05 14 45 00 2010 10 06 00 00 00 2010 10 05 00 00 00 Mon 2010 10 11 00 00 00 2010 10 06 00 00 00 Mon 2010 10 04 00 00 00 Sat 2010 10
313. symbol Disabled grey Enabled green Unavailable red Testing blue Type Displays the type of the object e g IP Creation Date Displays the date and time of adding this object into the system Node ID Displays the identification number of the device that has been assigned to the device by the user according to the user s classification system Object ID Displays unique identification code of the object within the Net Inspector system This identification code consists of two integers separated by a dot e g 1 2 The first integer is the Net Inspector configuration number while the second integer uniquely identifies the object within the given configuration In Active User View Indicates if the object is included in the currently active user view i e if the check mark is present the given object is included in the currently active user view Description Displays and lets you edit a short description of the object For managed objects Net Inspector discovery operation sets this value to the value of the sysDescription 0 object instance returned by the SNMP agent on the managed object Class Displays the class of the object which can be one of the following Workstation Server Printer Switch Router Gateway Equipment Multiplexer Transport Database Action System O Oooovoovoovododododoa O 204 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Device Panel Dialog Box Tags Displays tags use
314. t do not match the filter criteria e g device IP address type class vendor etc Discovery filter drop down list Lets you select an existing filter New condition toolbar IP Address lis y 192 168 2 14 CONDITION OPERATOR VALUE TYPE This toolbar lets you create a filter condition by specifying the condition type operator and value from the corresponding drop down lists input lines Once the condition is configured you can add it to the filter by clicking the Add button in the right section of the dialog box Added conditions appear in the Conditions panel below the New condition toolbar Condition type drop down list Specifies the type of the condition You can select among the following types of conditions a IP address If this condition type is selected you can enter the IP address of the managed object into the value input line a IP address range If this condition type is selected you can enter the IP address range into the accompanying From and To input lines a Object type If this condition type is selected you can choose a type of the managed object from the Value drop down list e g IP etc a Class If this condition type is selected you can select a class of the managed object from the Value drop down list e g Workstation a Location If this condition type is selected you can enter the object location into the Value input line e g MG SOFT Headquarters
315. t reports an event on the EQ 60 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Properties Window managed object must contain the specified enterprise OID in order for it to be accepted by Net Inspector as event Trap count binding input line Specifies which variable binding in the variable bindings list e g binding nr 3 or 4 or 5 of the SNMP notification message reports the current event count i e the number of events on the given managed object Net Inspector Server checks the continuity of this counter in every received SNMP notification message reporting events to determine if its list of events is synchronized with the list of events maintained internally by the managed object If a difference in the trap count value is detected Net Inspector executes the above configured resynchronization command Services View The Services view is displayed only in the LITE Edition of Net Inspector In other editions of Net Inspector the services statistics are displayed in the Performance Statistics window The Services view lets you scan the well known ports on the device for supported TCP and UDP network services These services include HTTP HTTPS FTP DNS SMTP IMAP IMAPS POP3 SSH Telnet NNTP NNTPS SIP H 323 LDAP LDAPS IPP LPD MsSQL MySQL and Oracle service The Services view lets you configure which of the detected network services will be monitored on the given device Furthermore in this view you can configur
316. t storage database 10212 Failed to access event storage Cannot access the event storage database database Possible reasons Error while disconnecting from the database 10215 Failed to connect to event storage Cannot connect to the event storage database for event queries database for event queries Possible reasons incorrect settings database not reachable 10216 Failed to initialize event storage Cannot create or retrieve tables from the database for event queries event storage database for event queries 10217 Failed to access event storage Cannot access the event storage database database for event queries for event queries Possible reasons Error while disconnecting from the database 10220 Failed to connect to event storage Cannot connect to the event storage database for event maintenance database for event maintenance Possible reasons incorrect settings database not reachable 10221 Failed to initialize event storage Cannot create or retrieve tables from the database for event maintenance event storage database for event maintenance 10222 Failed to access event storage Cannot access the event storage database database for event maintenance for event maintenance Possible reasons Error while disconnecting from the database 10230 Failed to initialize SNMP sub Cannot connect to MG SOFT SNMP Trap system to register SNMP service mgtrapd Possible reasons MG notifications SOFT SNMP Trap service is not running 10231 Failed
317. t the threshold values for triggering and clearing alarms associated with the system resource utilization If Net Inspector Server is used for polling the collected information will be displayed in the Resources view of the managed object s Properties window If Performance Manager polling engine is polling the device the collected information will be displayed in the Memory and Processor Info frame and in the in the Storage Info frame in the Device Statistics window 111 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Server Settings Dialog Box Memory usage checkbox and two input lines If this checkbox is checked you can enter the device memory usage threshold values in into the accompanying input lines This way Net Inspector will trigger an alarm when the device memory usage exceeds the configured value for raising the alarm first input line and clear the alarm when the memory usage falls below the clear alarm threshold value Second input line CPU load checkbox and two input lines If this checkbox is checked you can enter the device CPU load threshold values in into the accompanying input lines This way Net Inspector will trigger an alarm when the device CPU load exceeds the configured value for raising the alarm first input line and clear the alarm when the CPU load falls below the clear alarm threshold value second input line Storage usage checkbox and two input lines If this checkbox is checked you can e
318. ted upward the hierarchical map branch for all objects and submaps The Propagation view of the relevant suomap Properties window lets you enable or disable the propagation for individual objects included in that map A map icon in the Map Explorer window reflects different colors to indicate the current status of objects included in the map and its submaps if propagation is not disabled Colors reflected by map icons can be can be configured in the User Preferences dialog box By default map icons reflect the following colors E the map contains no managed action or system objects 3 the status of all objects in the given map and its suomaps is unmanaged a the most critical object status in the given map and its submaps is indeterminate this is an intermediate status e g displayed immediately after enabling device polling E the most critical object status in the given map and its submaps is normal note that such maps may contain also unmanaged objects S the most critical status of the objects in the given map and its submaps is major status of at least one object in the given map branch is major Ey the most critical status of the objects in the given map and its submaps is critical status of at least one object in the given map branch is critical Note Map icons always reflect the most critical status for example if a map contains objects whose statuses are normal
319. ted with the selected objects in it For the description of alarms and related commands please refer to the Events Window section of this manual LA 37 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Net Inspector Client Main Window 3 2 Explorer Window 3 2 1 Purpose The Explorer window is used for exploring and switching between user views assigned to the user as well as for creating new user views It is also used for viewing and modifying the hierarchical map structure of user views and for displaying the contents of submaps in the Maps window Moreover the Explorer window is used for configuring and monitoring the object status and alarm propagation 3 2 2 Opening To display or hide the Explorer window use the View Explorer toggle command or the i Explorer toolbar button 3 2 3 Description The Explorer window graphically displays the Net Inspector workspace structure e all user views assigned to the user and hierarchical tree like structures of maps and submaps within the active user view The workspace is a conceptual environment that allows users to group objects into maps and to structure such maps in a hierarchical manner within user views Double clicking a map icon in the Explorer window creates a new tab in the Maps window and displays the map contents in it Double clicking a user view icon in the Explorer window activates the double clicked user view and displays its top level maps in the Explorer win
320. ters frame Enabled checkbox If this checkbox is checked the corresponding filter is enabled applied meaning that only alarms that match the filter conditions will be included into outgoing e mails sent by the given mail object Filter list Displays the names of available filters Manage Action Filters button Opens the Manage Action Filters dialog box LU 80 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Action Object Properties Windows Statistics View The Statistics view provides the following controls all input lines are read only Events processed input line Displays the total number of processed events since enabling the object or last resetting the statistics Successful input line Displays the number of successfully processed events since enabling the object or last resetting the statistics Last successful input line Displays the date and time of the last successfully processed event since enabling the object or last resetting the statistics Failed input line Displays the number of unsuccessfully processed events since enabling the object or last resetting the statistics Last failed input line Displays the date and time of the last unsuccessfully processed event since enabling the object or last resetting the statistics Reset statistics button Resets clears the statistics for the given action object Disabling and re enabling the object does not reset the statistics Button
321. th the Google Maps coordinates X input line Specifies the geographic coordinate projected on the X axis Y input line Specifies the geographic coordinate projected on the Y axis Z input line Specifies the geographic coordinate projected on the Z axis Settings View The Settings view contains the following controls Polling profile drop down list This drop down list displays the name of the polling profile assigned to the managed object A polling profile contains a set of parameters for polling managed objects via ICMP and SNMP protocols To assign a different polling profile to the managed object select its name from the Polling profile drop down list Polling profiles are managed in the Server Settings dialog box Profiles panel SNMP access profile drop down list This drop down list displays the name of the SNMP access profile assigned to the managed object An SNMP access profile contains a set of parameters for accessing SNMP agents on managed objects To assign a different SNMP access profile to the LJ 59 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Properties Window managed object select its name from the drop down list SNMP access profiles are managed in the Manages Profil Server Settings dialog box Profiles panel es button Opens the Server Settings dialog box Profiles panel Resynchroniza The settings in Command wit are synchronize tion frame this frame control how the ev
322. the filter will let trough only those alarms that satisfy both conditions at the same time The Simple mode does not let you manipulate logical operators it only lets you configure and add filter conditions to the filter This mode also does not allow combining different types of filter conditions with the logical OR operator The Advanced mode which can be enabled by clicking the Advanced tab in the Create Filter dialog box lets you create much more complex filters than the Simple mode as it imposes no restrictions on combing filter conditions or using logical operators In advanced mode you can double click any logical operator in the hierarchical filter tree and change it from AND to OR or vice versa Furthermore you can add new logical operators to the selected filter subtree by clicking the AND or OR buttons located in the right hand side of the dialog box and then add new conditions as child items to those operators This way you can create complex filters that comprise more than two hierarchical levels which the Simple mode of operation is restricted to Switching Between Modes To select desired mode of operation click the corresponding tab Simple Advanced in the Conditions panel You can switch to another mode even while you are already creating a filter and then continue creating it in another mode however with some restrictions While you can always switch from Simple to Advanced mode you cannot switch from Advanced to
323. the left is used for traversing the expandable MIB tree and selecting the pop up commands like Get GetNext Walk etc The Results panel on the right side displays returned values i e the name or OID syntax and value of every retrieved object instance or an error message e g a timeout The MIB Browser window provides the following controls Address drop down list The IP address or hostname of the managed object to be queried Toolbar ei Contact button Queries the SNMP agent on the managed object by means of an SNMP GetNext request and displays query results in the Results panel of the MIB Browser window If the queried SNMP agent responds this operation returns the value of the first OID in lexicographical order that is implemented in the SNMP agent typically sysDescr 0 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 1 0 209 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual MIB Browser Window 22 Get button Sends an SNMP Get request to the SNMP agent on the managed object to retrieve the value of the object instance selected in the MIB tree The result is displayed in the Results panel a EI Get Next button Sends an SNMP GetNext request to the SNMP agent on the managed object to retrieve the value of the object instance that lexicographically follows the MIB object selected in the MIB tree The result is displayed in the Results panel Bi Walk button Performs the SNMP Walk operation from the selected node in the MIB tree i e su
324. the notification PDU For example the number 3 means that this variable binding must be the third binding in the variable bindings list Note that SNMP specification requires that the first and the second variable binding in all SNMPv2c and SNMPv3 Trap and Inform PDUs be sysUpTime 0 and snmpTrapOID 0 respectively this is not required for SNMPv1 Traps Therefore consider this requirement when creating trap to alarm rules for notifications transmitted via SNMPv2c or SNMPv3 Any checkbox If checked all variable bindings in the received notification PDU are checked for the matching binding This option can useful when the position of bindings in Trap PDUs vary or when creating a trap to alarm rule to cover SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c v3 notifications note that the first binding in a specific SNMPv1 Trap will be the third binding in equivalent SNMPv2c or SNMPv3 Trap Note this option should be disabled if possible as it may significantly degrade the Net Inspector Server performance OK button Applies the changes and closes the Binding Editor dialog box A preview of the newly configured variable binding is displayed in the New condition toolbar Click the Add button in the New Edit Trap to Alarm Rules dialog box first screen to add the configured condition to trap filter Cancel button Discards the changes and closes the Binding Editor dialog box Operator drop down list Displays the condition operator e g is
325. this radio button is selected the maintenance operation is executed when the total number of events alarms in the database exceeds the configured value X For example if X 10000 and the actual number of events alarms in the database is 11500 the maintenance operation will delete the 1500 oldest events alarms from the database a When events are older than X days and Y hours radio button and input lines If this radio button is selected the maintenance operation is executed when the age of events alarms in the database exceeds the configured value X days and Y hours All events alarms older than X days and Y hours will be deleted from the database Status bar The status bar is displayed at the bottom of the Properties window and provides information about the following object properties from left to right a The icon and name of the system object a The object ID of the system object a The current status of the system object 7 2 Configuration Properties Window 7 2 1 Purpose The Configuration Properties window is used for viewing the settings of a particular Net Inspector configuration object and alarms associated with it 7 2 2 Opening The Configuration Properties window can be opened by double clicking the configuration system object icon in the Maps window or by right clicking the configuration object and selecting the Properties pop up command 7 2 3 Description The configuration object represen
326. to be added This can be an IP managed object or an action object In the second step you need to specify the object properties e g name description etc as well as select the sub map and configuration to which you want to add the object This dialog box lets you add a new object to the system in a wizard like fashion and has two screens the Select object type screen and the Object properties screen 1 The Select object type screen provides the following controls Select object type list Displays and lets you select the type and class of the object to be added This can be an IP managed object e g IP server IP router or an action object MAIL SMS CMD Select the desired type of the object and click the Next button to proceed to the next screen Next button Lets you proceed to the next screen i e the Object properties screen Cancel button Discards all changes and closes the dialog box 2 The Object properties screen provides the following controls Name input line Lets you enter the name for the new object Address input line Lets you enter the IP address or the host name for the IP managed object This input line is disabled for other objects 31 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Net Inspector Client Main Window Description input line Lets you enter a short description of the object Vendor input line Lets you enter the vendor of the object Class drop down list
327. to full buffer LU 95 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual System Object Properties Windows Pop Up Menu To display the pop menu right click one or more alarms in the list of active alarms The pop up menu contains the following commands m Details Opens the Event Details window which displays details of the selected alarm This window display the same information as the Event Details sub window Add Comment Opens the Add Comment dialog box that lets you enter or edit comment for the selected alarms Comments are displayed in the Comment column Akcnowledge Acknowledges the selected alarms By acknowledging alarms users declare that they are aware of the alarms Acknowledged alarms are not shown in the alarm balloons Unacknowledge Unacknowledges the selected alarms reverses the Acknowledge operation Manually Clear Manually clears the selected alarms Note that Net Inspector system alarms i e alarms that have the Message ID value in the range of 10000 15000 cannot be manually cleared Manually Unclear Unclears the selected alarms reverses the Manually Clear operation Remove Cleared Alarms Removes all cleared alarms from the list Find Events Opens the Find Events dialog box and automatically inserts appropriate search conditions for finding events or alarms associated with the given object Export Opens the Export Events dialog box which lets you export alarms currently displayed in the
328. toring a detected service check the checkbox in front of its name in the Services list and click the Apply button in the Properties window toolbar This button is disabled while the scan operation is in progress Add button Opens the New Service dialog box which lets you manually add a service to the Services list This is useful for example if a service does not listen on the standard port or if you want to monitor a user defined TCP or UDP service To enable monitoring a manually added service check the checkbox in front of the services name in the Services list and click the Apply button in the Properties window toolbar Edit button Opens the Edit Service dialog box which lets you edit service properties Remove button Removes the selected service from the list and stops monitoring the service if monitoring was enabled Details button Opens the Service Properties dialog box which lets you view service properties This dialog has the same appearance as the Edit Service dialog box with a difference that all properties are displayed read only here New Edit Service dialog box The New Service dialog box and Edit Service dialog box let you add a new network service and edit the properties of an existing network service To open the New Service dialog box click the Add button in the Services view of the managed object Properties window To open the Edit Service dialog box click the Edit button in the Services view of th
329. tors and values kindly refer to the New condition toolbar description Click the Apply button in the Conditions panel to apply the changes after you finish editing the condition Note The Simple mode does not lets you change the condition type when editing a condition in the Conditions panel LO 124 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Server Settings Dialog Box To edit an existing logical operator Advanced mode only simply double click it in the Conditions panel or select it and click the Edit button on the right hand aide mam of the dialog box This displays the drop down list from which you can select another logical operator Note In the Conditions panel green logical operators are active while the white operators are inactive see the picture above Only active operators are in effect A logical operator is active if it has at least two directly or indirectly subordinated conditions in the hierarchical filter tree Buttons a Add Adds the condition from the New condition toolbar to the Conditions panel In Advanced mode the condition is added to the selected branch in the filter tree a Edit Lets you edit the selected condition or operator Operators can be modified only in Advanced mode a Remove Removes the selected condition or operator and all its subordinated objects from the Conditions panel Operators a AND Adds the logical AND operator to the selected filter branch This button is enabled
330. ts a particular Net Inspector configuration i e a configX section present in Net Inspector Server initialization file Depending on the configuration of the system more than one configuration object may exist in Net Inspector A configuration object triggers alarms when there are problems with the corresponding Net Inspector configuration module e g if it cannot connect to the configuration database etc Furthermore the status of a configuration object changes if any critical faults occur in the given configuration subsystem module The Configuration Properties window contains two views that display different categories of parameters i e General and Settings view Users can switch between 91 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual System Object Properties Windows the views by selecting the corresponding entries from the category drop down list displayed in upper section of the Configuration Properties window General View The General view contains the following controls Name input line Displays the name of the system object Type input line Displays the type of the system object Description input line Displays a short description of the system object Active alarms frame Displays a summary and a list of active alarms associated with the object Summary displays the total number of active alarms and the number of active alarms broken down by severity levels The list of alarms is displayed in the
331. ts all modifications Category drop down list Displays the currently selected view e g General Settings and lets you switch between the views For more information on views categories of parameters see the Description section Test button Tries to execute the action to check if everything is configured properly Status bar The status bar is displayed at the bottom of the Command Properties window and provides information about the following object properties from left to right a The icon and name of the action object a The object ID of the action object a The current status of the action object La 87 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual System Object Properties Windows 7 SYSTEM OBJECT PROPERTIES WINDOWS The system objects represent different parts of Net Inspector system System objects can be placed onto maps and monitored in the same way as managed objects A system object triggers alarms when there is a problem with the Net Inspector subsystem it represents Furthermore the status of a system objects changes if any critical faults occur in the subsystems it represents This principle lets you monitor the health of the system in the way that is consistent with the way of monitoring the network devices It is recommend that administrators add system objects to user view s that are assigned to administrators and group the system objects in a separate map e g System within those u
332. ts dialog box which lets you export alarms currently displayed in the General view of the Mail Properties window to a HTML or CSV comma separated value file format The Export Events dialog box closely resembles the operating system s standard Save As dialog box Note that only information provided by the columns which are currently displayed will be exported Select All Ctrl A Selects all displayed alarms LJ 69 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Action Object Properties Windows a Table Options cascading menu Q Keep Cleared Alarms toggle menu option If this option is checked alarms that are cleared by Net Inspector remain listed in the current view otherwise they automatically disappear from the current list of alarms when cleared a Keep Manually Cleared Alarms toggle menu option If this option is checked alarms that are manually cleared by the user remain listed in the current view otherwise they automatically disappear from the current list of alarms when cleared Settings View The Settings view contains the following controls Sender frame Name input line Lets you specify the name of the e mail sender e g the name of the e mail account holder E mail input line Specifies the sender s e mail address Reply to input line Specifies the reply to e mail address Organization input line Specifies the name of the sender s organization Recipients frame To Cc fi
333. ts you control what SNMP profiles will be used in the discovery operation and how as follows Use all configured SNMP Profiles checkbox If this checkbox is checked all existing SNMP profiles will be used in the discovery operation First the network will be scanned using the SNMPv3 profile s then using the SNMPv2c and finally by using the SNMPv1 profile s Every managed object is automatically assigned that SNMP profile with which is has been discovered If this checkbox is not checked you can specify what SNMP profiles will be used in the discovery operation and in which order This can be configured using the following controls Not used in discovery list Displays the names of existing SNMP profiles that will not be used in the discovery operation To use a specific SNMP profile in discovery select it in the list and click the right arrow button at the bottom of the list This moves the selected profile to the Used in discovery list Used in discovery list Displays the names of existing SNMP profiles that will be used in the discovery operation This list also determines the order in which SNMP profiles will be used for discovering the network devices first the top listed profile will be used then the second profile from the top will be used etc To move a profile up or down on the list select it and click the Up or Down button next to this list respectively The order of the SNMP profiles determines which SNMP profiles
334. urces view displays the following information Cy 64 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Properties Window Info frame This frame displays information about the available memory used memory number of processes and users on the system as reported by the SNMP agent Besides the memory usage in is displayed in a linear gauge chart Processor frame Displays the CPU load in for all processors in the system as reported by the SNMP agent Storage View The Storage view is displayed only if the SNMP agent on the managed object supports the HOST RESOURCES MIB module and provides this MIB information via SNMP Note How frequently the information displayed in this view is updated depends on the polling interval set in the polling profile assigned to the given managed object The Storage view provides the following information and controls Hide removable storages checkbox If this checkbox is checked the information about removable storage units e g floppy drives optical drives etc is not displayed Storages frame Displays all data storage units on the system e g disk partition virtual memory physical memory etc capacities of these storage units and their current usage Usage of storage units in is depicted also in 3 D pie charts in the right section of the view Buttons Enable Start Polling button Starts polling the object Disable Stop Polling button Stops polling the
335. ured by the IP SLAs exceeds the configured value for raising the alarm first input line and clear the alarm when the destination to source jitter falls below the clear alarm threshold value second input line Cisco packet loss SD checkbox and two input lines If this checkbox is checked the VoIP source to destination packet loss threshold is enabled This applies to one way packet loss from source to destination router Enter the source to destination packet loss threshold values in into the accompanying input lines This way Net Inspector will trigger an alarm when the source to destination packet loss as measured by the IP SLAs exceeds the configured value for raising the alarm first input line and clear the alarm when the source to destination packet loss falls below the clear alarm threshold value second input line Cisco packet loss DS checkbox and two input lines If this checkbox is checked the VoIP destination to source packet loss threshold is enabled This applies to one way packet loss from destination to source router Enter the destination to source packet loss threshold values in into the accompanying input lines This way Net Inspector will trigger an alarm when the destination to source packet loss as measured by the IP SLAs exceeds the configured value for raising the alarm first input line and clear the alarm when the destination to source packet loss falls below the clear alarm threshold value sec
336. ut the display status displayed hidden order and width of the columns available in this window a Create Trap to Alarm Rule Opens the New Trap To Alarm dialog box first screen and automatically inserts filter conditions that match the SNMP notification attributes of the selected alarm This way you can quickly create a trap to alarm rule from a received specific SNMP notification that is from a Specific SNMP notification alarm This command is enabled only if you select an alarm that is based on a received enterprise specific SNMP Trap or Inform message such alarms have Specific SNMP notification alarm message and Warning severity level o Table Options cascading menu a Keep Cleared Alarms toggle menu option If this option is checked alarms that are cleared automatically by Net Inspector remain listed in the current view otherwise they automatically disappear from the current list of alarms a Keep Manually Cleared Alarms toggle menu option If this option is checked alarms that are manually cleared by the user remain listed in the current view otherwise they automatically disappear from the current list of alarms EN 49 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Net Inspector Client Main Window 3 4 5 Event Details Sub Window Purpose Is a sub window of the Events window used for viewing detailed information about the event or alarm selected in the Events window Opening The Ki E
337. vent Details button in the Events window displays or hides the Event Details sub window Description The General Event Info Section Select an alarm or event in the Events window and expand the General Event Info section in the Event Details sub window to view alarm event details The following details are displayed under the General Event Info section Severity Displays the symbol and description of the alarm or event severity level Date Time Displays the date and time of triggering the alarm or event The date and time format depends on the Date Time format parameter setting in the User Preferences dialog box Source Displays the name of the object as shown on the map which has triggered the alarm event Subordinated to this item the location of the source object is displayed i e the full path to the containing map Comment Displays the alarm comment added by a user Each comment is automatically prefixed with the username of the user that has added the comment and the IP address of the Net Inspector Client from which the comment has been added Source Type Displays the type of the object which has triggered the alarm event e g IP Source Info Displays additional information about the problem For example in case of a threshold event alarm it explains what threshold has been crossed e g Physical memory Message Displays a short description of the alarm event e g Missing ATM connection data
338. verity levels and their default colors 21 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Net Inspector Client Main Window Example polaris Let us suppose that 2 active alarms concurrently exist on the managed object The severity levels of these alarms are Major and Critical The critical alarm has been acknowledged by the network operator while the major alarm has not been acknowledged yet In such case the alarm balloon will indicate the number 1 as there is one non acknowledged alarm associated with the object and reflect the color assigned to the Major severity level i e orange by default as shown in the picture on the left The alarm rectangle on the other hand will show the total number of active alarms 2 and reflect the color of the critical alarm i e red by default Note also that the icon background in the picture on the left reflects the red color indicating that the status of this managed object is Critical according to the default color settings Graphics Toolbar The Graphics toolbar is used for adding graphic elements lines connections rectangles ellipses images etc and text to the Maps window In addition it is used for setting the properties of graphic elements color line width etc and for arranging icons and graphic elements in the Maps window snap to grid Furthermore the Graphics toolbar is used for saving the layout of maps for locking and unlocking maps for editing and
339. very Filters Dialog Box relations between them The Conditions panel displays a filter in form of a hierarchical tree where filter conditions are connected with logical operators AND OR Action filter conditions can be specified by using the following controls in the New Edit Filter dialog box Name input line Specifies the name of the discovery filter New condition toolbar IP Address vis v 192 168 2 14 CONDITION OPERATOR VALUE TYPE This toolbar lets you create a filter condition by specifying the condition type operator and value from the corresponding drop down lists input lines Once the condition is configured you can add it to the filter by clicking the Add button in the right section of the dialog box Added conditions appear in the Conditions panel below the New condition toolbar Condition type drop down list Specifies the type of the condition You can select among the following types of conditions a IP address If this condition type is selected you can enter the IP address of the managed object into the value input line a IP address range If this condition type is selected you can enter the IP address range into the accompanying From and To input lines Q Object type If this condition type is selected you can choose a type of the managed object from the Value drop down list e g IP etc a Class If this condition type is selected you can select a class of the managed object f
340. vided by the MIDI interfaces group of objects Note How frequently the information displayed in this view is updated depends on the polling interval set in the polling profile assigned to the given managed object By default the Interfaces view lists all network interfaces on the managed object and displays the following columns Interface Displays the name of the interface as reported by the SNMP agent Status Displays the status of the interface as reported by the SNMP agent In Util Displays the inbound utilization rate of the interface as reported by the SNMP agent Out Util Displays the outbound utilization rate of the interface as reported by the SNMP agent Additional information about interfaces in additional columns can be displayed in this view by selecting entries from the column selector E displayed above the vertical scrollbar of this view For the meaning of these columns please see the description of columnar objects in the ifTable RFC1213 MIB Details button Opens the Details dialog box displaying detailed information about the selected interface Resources View The Resources view is displayed only if the SNMP agent on the managed object supports the HOST RESOURCES MIB module and provides this MIB information via SNMP Note How frequenily the information displayed in this view is updated depends on the polling interval set in the polling profile assigned to the given managed object The Reso
341. w can contain one or more tabs By default the Events window contains only the Active Alarms tab which displays all active alarms that exist on the objects included in the currently displayed user view Additional tabs can be added to the Events window as described below By default cleared alarms automatically disappear from the list of alarms displayed in the Active Alarms tab in the Events window Furthermore by default alarms that have been manually cleared by users remain listed in the Active Alarms tab This behavior can be customized for each tab by means of the Table Options toggle commands Users can add new tabs to the Events window in several ways a By searching for alarms or events using the Find Events dialog box Event Find which displays the search results in a new search tab 3 Alarm lists in the search tabs are static meaning that they do not change over time as opposed to the dynamic alarm lists displayed in the Active Alarms tab alarm history tabs and in filter tabs Furthermore alarms displayed in the search tabs cannot be managed acknowledged unacknowledged manually cleared manually uncleared LO 44 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Net Inspector Client Main Window a By creating a filter in the Create Filter dialog box Event Create Filter which displays filtered alarms in a new display filter tab 57 A filtered list of alarms is dynamic meaning that newly triggered alarms that match the
342. will serve as the filter criterion For example if the Name and Status columns are selected in the Filter Bar drop down list and you enter the string maj into the Filter Bar input line the Device Panel dialog box will display only those rows objects that include the string maj in the Name and Status columns i e Major Status majnik Name see the picture below 202 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Device Panel Dialog Box x Show A Name Status Alarms Type Creation D E q hercules amp Major Mon Nov New Alarms IP denge Quer NEP ne tov g majnik x Critical BE Baie IP Mon Nov lt lt lt The Device Panel dialog box displays a table of all objects in the system Each row in the table represents one object By default rows are colored according to the current status of the object the row coloring feature can be disabled by unchecking the Use Colors option in the column selector The Device Panel dialog box lists details about the objects in the following columns you can display or hide individual columns by clicking their names in the column selector El on top of the vertical scrollbar of the Device Panel dialog box Monitoring State checkbox A check mark in this checkbox indicates that the corresponding object is enabled For a managed object this means that the device it represents is being monitored by Net Inspector For an
343. window and select the Close All pop up command Net Inspector automatically saves the information about open tabs in the Maps window for every user and user view and restores the tabs except the chart tabs next time the user opens the user view Map Views The Maps window can display objects and submaps either as icons Graphics view or by means of a table Details view You can switch between both views by selecting the Graphics and Details entries in the toolbar drop down list 1 Details View The Details view displays the contents of a map by means of a table where each table row represents one object managed action or system object or submap Filter Bar drop down list The Filter Bar is displayed on the right side of the toolbar above the Maps window It lets you enter text that functions as a filter i e it displays only those objects in the currently active tab of the Maps window Details view that contain the entered text in selected columns To specify which columns will be taken into account click the filter 13 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Net Inspector Client Main Window symbol and select desired columns from the drop down menu that appears columns are described in details below Then enter the text in to the accompanying input line which will serve as the filter criterion For example if the Name and Status columns are selected in the Filter Bar drop down list and you enter the string
344. without providing the old password New password input line Lets you enter a new user account password Retype password input line Lets you confirm the new password by re entering it User must change password at login checkbox Lets you check or uncheck the checkbox If the checkbox is checked the user will be prompted to change his her password the next time he she logs on to Net Inspector Server This checkbox is not available if you open this dialog box by selecting the Tools Change Password command Change button Applies all changes and closes the dialog box Cancel button Discards all changes and closes the dialog box 8 3 Profiles Panel Purpose The Profiles Panel is used for viewing and managing SNMP and polling profiles for monitoring managed objects Description The SNMP access profiles contain parameters for accessing SNMP agents on managed objects e g community names etc and for receiving SNMP Trap and Inform notification messages sent by those SNMP agents The polling profiles contain parameters for polling managed objects by means of ICMP and SNMP protocols e g polling intervals alarm thresholds etc Once a new SNMP access or polling profile is created it can be manually assigned to managed objects in the managed object s Properties window Profiles are assigned to managed objects also automatically by the discovery operation The Profiles Panel contains two tabs the Polli
345. wledge Acknowledges the selected alarms By acknowledging alarms users declare that they are aware of the alarms Acknowledged alarms are not shown in the alarm balloons a Unacknowledge Unacknowledges the selected alarms reverses the Acknowledge operation a Manually Clear Manually clears the selected alarms Note that Net Inspector system alarms i e alarms that have the Message ID value in the range of 10000 15000 cannot be manually cleared a Manually Unclear Unclears the selected alarms reverses the Manually Clear operation a Remove Cleared Alarms Removes all cleared alarms from the list a Find Events Opens the Find Events dialog box and automatically inserts appropriate search conditions for finding events or alarms associated with the given object o Export Opens the Export Events dialog box which lets you export alarms currently displayed in the General view of the Properties window to a HTML or CSV comma separated value file format The Export Events dialog box closely resembles the operating system s standard Save As dialog box Note that only information provided by the columns which are currently displayed will be exported o Select All Ctrl A Selects all displayed alarms LA 57 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Properties Window a Table Options cascading menu a Keep Cleared Alarms toggle menu option If this option is checked alarms that are cleared by Net Inspector rem
346. x second screen 14 3 Description This dialog box has the same general appearance and is used in the same way as the Event Attributes Panel 4 182 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Manage Action Filters Dialog Box 15 MANAGE ACTION FILTERS DIALOG BOX 15 1 Purpose It is used for viewing and managing action filters Action filters can be applied to action objects to restrict their functionality so that only events that match the filter conditions will carry out the given action 15 2 Opening To open the Manage Action Filters dialog box click the Manage Action Filters button in the Filters view of the action object s Properties window 15 3 Description This dialog box has the same general appearance and is used in the same way as the Action Filters Panel 4 183 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Network Discovery Wizard 16 NETWORK DISCOVERY WIZARD 16 1 Purpose The Network Discovery Wizard lets you configure the settings for and start the network discovery operation in a few guided steps The network discovery operation can discover the devices and topology of your network and automatically add discovered devices as managed objects to Net Inspector configuration and map s Net Inspector starts automatically monitoring the added managed objects 16 2 Opening To display the first screen of the Network Discovery Wizard select the Tools Discovery Wizard command or clic
347. y The alarm mapping screen also determines whether the given trap to alarm rule e matching SNMP notification will raise or clear the alarm New Trap to Alarm Rule x Severity E Critical v Message PSU OFF z Manage Messages Source Info mcunitSupplyOffTrap seak Jr Log J cancel Example of Trap To Alarm dialog box second screen The second screen of the New Edit Trap To Alarm dialog box provides the following controls Severity drop down list Lets you select the severity level for the resulting alarm If the severity level is set to a value other than Cleared the rule will trigger raise alarm If the severity level is set to Cleared the rule will clear the alarm provided that other conditions for clearing the alarm trap filter alarm message source info are also met Message drop down list Lets you specify the message text for the resulting alarm To create a new message or edit an existing user defined message click the Manage Messages 135 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Server Settings Dialog Box button and add edit a message in the dialog box that appears then select the new edited message from the Message drop down list Note that the message value serves as one of the conditions for clearing the alarm Manage Messages button Opens the Manage Event Attributes dialog box that lets you view the built in alarm messages event types
348. y clear manually unclear as this also triggers events Note 2 It is important to note that action objects function globally i e by default they perform actions for all objects included in the system irrespective of the user views For example if you add an action object e g Mail object to a user view it will carry out the designated action e g send e mail not only when events associated with the objects included in the currently active user view are triggered but also when events on any other object registered with Net Inspector are triggered To limit the functionality of action objects to perform actions only for a particular subgroup of objects e g to objects included in the given user view administrators should configure appropriate action filters and apply them to action objects Note 3 At least one action filter must be applied to each action object If no filter is applied the action object will fail to perform its function Filters are configured in the Manage Action Filters dialog box and can be applied to action objects in their respective Properties windows Filters view as described in the following sections The properties of action objects can be viewed and configured in their respective Properties windows This section describes the Properties windows of action objects 6 1 Mail Properties Window 6 1 1 Purpose The Mail Properties window is used for viewing and configuring parameters of the given
349. y no effect Trap community input line This setting has currently no effect SNMPv3 Settings frame The SNMPv3 security settings This frame is disabled if SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c protocol is selected in the SNMP version frame Security user name input line The name of the SNMPv3 USM user to be used for exchanging all SNMPv3 messages between Net Inspector and managed objects including SNMPv3 Trap and Inform messages sent by the managed objects 0 211 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual MIB Browser Window Context name input line The name of the context in which the management information conveyed in SNMPv3 messages is accessed Authentication protocol drop down list and Change Password Key button The drop down list lets you select the SNMPv3 authentication protocol HMAC MD5 or HMAC SHA to be used for authenticating SNMPv3 messages sent on behalf of the given SNMPv3 user The Change Password Key button opens the Authentication Password or Key dialog box that lets you enter the authentication protocol password or key Privacy protocol drop down list and Change Password Key button The drop down list lets you select the SNMPv3 privacy protocol CBC DES or CFB AES 128 to be used for encrypting SNMPv3 messages sent on behalf of the given SNMPv3 user The Change Password Key button opens the Privacy Password or Key dialog box that lets you enter the privacy protocol password or key Do not localize authenticatio
350. you select a time period for the search operation i e Today This week This month User defined The search operation will look only for those alarms events that have been triggered within the specified time frame From To input lines These input lines display the start and end date and time for the search operation depending on the entry selected in the Time frame drop down list If the User defined option is selected in the Time frame drop down list you can specify an arbitrary time frame for the search operation by entering the start and end date and time into the From and To input lines The search operation will look only for those alarms events that have been triggered within the specified time frame The From an To date and time values are formatted according to the setting of the Date Time format parameter in the Client Preferences dialog box Search in radio buttons a Active Alarms Enables searching for active alarms only a All Alarms Enables searching for all alarms active and cleared a Events Enables searching for evenis 176 MG SOFT Net Inspector Reference Manual Find Events Dialog Box New condition toolbar Severity vj lis k E critical e CONDITION OPERATOR VALUE TYPE This toolbar lets you create a search condition by selecting the condition type operator and value from the corresponding drop down lists Once the condition is configured you can add it to the search f

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

  Visualizza - Service, Support  Philips myLiving  VGN-CR116E/P  Validação_2014_DSCI_03JUN_VF _2_  (Microsoft PowerPoint - SAC8711-user guide-09812-\246L  menu/bright  Fiche au format PDF  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file